What The Units Are About

BTEC
FIRST
INFORMATION AND CREATIVE

TECHNOLOGY
Issue 2
For more information on Edexcel and BTEC qualifications

please visit our website: www.edexcel.com
BTEC is a registered trademark of Pearson Education Limited
Pearson Education Limited. Registered in England and Wales No. 872828
Registered Office: Edinburgh Gate, Harlow, Essex CM20 2JE.
VAT Reg No GB 278537121
BTEC First Certificate and Extended Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Specification
Certificate
Extended Certificate
Specification
Certificate
Specification
INFORMATION AND
CREATIVE TECHNOLOGY
From September 2012
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Publications code
Issue 2
BF034953
A LW AY S L E A R N I N G
Pearson Education Limited is one of the UK's largest awarding organisations, offering
academic and vocational qualifications and testing to schools, colleges, employers
and other places of learning, both in the UK and internationally. Qualifications offered
include GCSE, AS and A Level, NVQ and our BTEC suite of vocational qualifications,
ranging from Entry Level to BTEC Higher National Diplomas. Pearson Education
Limited administers BTEC qualifications.
Through initiatives such as onscreen marking and administration, Pearson is leading
the way in using technology to modernise educational assessment, and to support
teachers and learners.
This specification is Issue 2. Key changes are sidelined. We will inform centres of any
changes to this issue. The latest issue can be found on the Edexcel website:
www.edexcel.com
References to third-party material made in this specification are made in good faith.
We do not endorse, approve or accept responsibility for the content of materials,
which may be subject to change, or any opinions expressed therein. (Material may
include textbooks, journals, magazines and other publications and websites.)
Publications Code BF034953

All the material in this publication is copyright
Pearson Education Limited 2013
Welcome to your BTEC First 2012 specification

For more than 25 years, BTECs have earned their reputation as well-established,
enduringly effective qualifications. They have a proven track record in improving
motivation and achievement among young learners. Additionally, BTECs provide
progression routes to the next stage of education or into employment.
BTECs are evolving

Informed by recent policy developments, including the Review of Vocational
Education The Wolf Report (March 2011), we have designed this new suite of
BTEC Firsts to:
ensure high quality and rigorous standards
conform to quality criteria for non-GCSE qualifications
be fit for purpose for learners, pre- or post-16, in schools and in colleges.
We conducted in-depth, independent consultations with schools, colleges, higher
education, employers, the Association of Colleges and other professional
organisations. This new suite builds on the qualities such as a clear vocational
context for learning and teacher-led assessment based on centre-devised
assignments that you told us make BTECs so effective and engaging.
This new suite introduces features to meet the needs of educators, employers and
the external environment. They are fully aligned with requirements for progression
to further study at level 3, into an apprenticeship or into the workplace. We believe
these features will make BTEC even stronger and more highly valued.
What are the key principles of the new suite of BTEC Firsts?
To support young people to succeed and progress in their education, we have drawn
on our consultations with you and embedded four key design principles into the new
BTEC Firsts.
1 Standards: a common core and external assessment
Each new Level 2 BTEC First qualification has an essential core of knowledge and
applied skills. We have introduced external assessment appropriate to the sector.
This provides independent evidence of learning and progression alongside the
predominantly portfolio-based assessment.
2 Quality: a robust quality-assurance model
Building on strong foundations, we have further developed our quality-assurance
model to ensure robust support for learners, centres and assessors.
We will make sure that:
every BTEC learners work is independently scrutinised through the external
assessment process
every BTEC assessor will take part in a sampling and quality review during the
teaching cycle
we visit each BTEC centre every year to review and support your quality processes.
We believe this combination of rigour, dialogue and support will underpin the validity
of the teacher-led assessment and the learner-centric approach that lie at the heart
of BTEC learning.
3 Breadth and progression: a range of options building on the core units;

contextualised English and mathematics
The essential core, developed in consultation with employers and educators, gives
learners the opportunity to gain a broad understanding and knowledge of a
vocational sector.
The mandatory unit(s) assesses knowledge, understanding and skills that are not
covered within the core units but are essential to the curriculum area or vocational
industry.
The optional specialist units provide a closer focus on a vocational area,
supporting progression into a more specialised level 3 vocational or academic course
or into an apprenticeship.
Opportunities to develop skills in English and mathematics are indicated in the units
where appropriate. These give learners the opportunity to practise these essential
skills in naturally occurring and meaningful contexts, where appropriate to the
industry.
The skills have been mapped against GCSE (including functional elements) English
and mathematics subject content areas.
4 Recognising achievement: opportunity to achieve at level 1
The new BTEC Firsts are level 2 qualifications with Pass, Merit, Distinction
and Distinction* grades.
However, we recognise that some learners may fail to achieve a Pass at Level 2,
so we have included the opportunity for learners to gain a level 1 qualification.
Improved specification and support

In our consultation, we also asked about what kind of guidance you, as teachers and
tutors, need. As a result, we have streamlined the specification itself to make the
units easier to navigate, and provided enhanced support in the accompanying
Delivery Guide.
Thank you
Finally, we would like to extend our thanks to everyone who provided support and
feedback during the development of the new BTEC Firsts, particularly all of you who
gave up many evenings of your own time to share your advice and experiences to
shape these new qualifications. We hope you enjoy teaching the course.
Contents
Purpose of this specification
What are BTEC Firsts?
Key features of the Edexcel BTEC First Certificate and Extended

Certificate
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate

in Information and Creative Technology
11
Qualification structure
15
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information and

Creative Technology
15
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in Information and

Creative Technology
16
Programme delivery
17
Resources
17
Delivery approach
18
Personal, learning and thinking skills
18
English and mathematics knowledge and skills
18
Access and recruitment
19
Prior knowledge, skills and understanding
19
Access to qualifications for learners with disabilities or specific needs
19
The layout of units in the specification
20
Internal assessment
23
Language of assessment
23
Summary of internal assessment
23
Assessment and verification roles
23
Learner preparation
25
Designing assessment instruments
25
Authenticity and authentication
27
Applying criteria to internal assessments
27
Assessment decisions
28
Late submission
28
Opportunities to retake assessments
28
Appeals
29
Dealing with malpractice
29
Reasonable adjustments to assessment
29
Special consideration
29
External assessment
31
Grade descriptors for the internal and external units
32
10 Awarding and reporting for the qualification
33
11 Quality assurance of centres
38
12 Further information and useful publications
39
13 Professional development and support
40
Units
41
Unit 1: The Online World
43
Unit 2: Technology Systems
51
Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio
59
Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation
71
Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio
87
Unit 6: Creating Digital Graphics
103
Unit 7: Creating Digital Video
119
Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development
135
Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development
151
Unit 10: Database Development
163
Unit 11: Computer Networks
179
Unit 12: Software Development
195
Unit 13: Website Development
213
Unit 14: Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware
229
Unit 15: Installing and Maintaining Computer Software
247
Unit 16: Automated Computer Systems
265
Unit 17: Multimedia Products Development
281
Annexe A
Annexe B
English knowledge and skills signposting
Annexe C
Mathematics knowledge and skills signposting
Annexe D
Synoptic assessment
Annexe E
297
297
301
301
305
305
309
309
311
The structure of the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and
Creative Technology
311
INTRODUCTION
Purpose of this specification

The purpose of this specification, as defined by Ofqual, is to set out:
the qualifications objectives
any other qualification that a learner must have completed before taking the
qualifications
any prior knowledge, skills or understanding that the learner is required to have
before taking the qualifications
units that a learner must have completed before the qualifications will be awarded,
and any optional routes
any other requirements that a learner must have satisfied before the learner will
be assessed, or before the qualifications will be awarded
the knowledge, skills and understanding that will be assessed as part of the
qualifications (giving a clear indication of their coverage and depth)
the method of any assessment and any associated requirements relating to it
the criteria against which learners level of attainment will be measured
(such as assessment criteria)
any specimen materials (supplied separately)
any specified levels of attainment.
BF034953 Specification Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate in
Information and Creative Technology Issue 2 February 2013 Pearson Education Limited 2013
INTRODUCTION
Qualification titles and Qualification

Numbers
Qualification
title
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in

Information and Creative Technology
Qualification
Number (QN)
600/6071/2
Qualification
title
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in

Qualification
Number (QN)
600/6072/4
These qualifications are on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF).

Your centre should use the Qualification Number (QN) when seeking funding for
your learners.
The qualification title, units and QN will appear on each learners final certificate.
You should tell your learners this when your centre recruits them and registers them
with us. Further information about certification is in the Edexcel Information Manual
on our website, www.edexcel.com
INTRODUCTION
1 What are BTEC Firsts?

BTEC First qualifications were originally designed for use in colleges, schools and
the workplace as an introductory level 2 course for learners wanting to study in
the context of a vocational sector. This is still relevant today. The knowledge,
understanding and skills learnt in studying a BTEC First will aid progression to
further study and prepare learners to enter the workplace in due course. Potential
employment opportunities, such as an apprenticeship or a supervised role
(depending on the specific job requirements) should be available in the information
technology sector and appropriate parts of the creative industries, such as computer
games development. These BTEC First qualifications provide learners with a taste of
what these sectors can offer, enabling them to make informed choices about their
future career.
These qualifications are intended primarily for learners in the 1419 age group, but
may also be used by other learners who wish to gain an introductory understanding
of a vocational area. When taken as part of a balanced curriculum, there is a clear
progression route to a level 3 course or to an apprenticeship.
BTECs are vocationally related qualifications, where learners develop knowledge
and understanding by applying their learning and skills in a work-related context.
Additionally, they are popular and effective because they engage learners to take
responsibility for their own learning and to develop skills that are essential for the
modern-day workplace. These skills include: teamworking; working from a prescribed
brief; working to deadlines; presenting information effectively; and accurately
completing administrative tasks and processes. BTEC Firsts motivate young learners,
and open doors to progression into further study and responsibility within the
workplace.
The BTEC First suite continues to reflect this ethos and builds on the
recommendations outlined in the Review of Vocational Education The Wolf Report
(March 2011). That report confirmed the importance of a broad and balanced
curriculum for learners.
INTRODUCTION
The BTEC First suite of qualifications

The following qualifications are part of the BTEC First suite for first teaching from
Autumn 2012:
Qualification
Award
Certificate
Extended
Certificate
Application of Science
Applied Science
Art and Design
Business
Engineering
Health and Social Care
Performing Arts
Principles of Applied Science
Sport
Visit www.btec.co.uk for information about these qualifications and also for
information about additional qualifications in larger sizes (Diploma), and in different
vocational sectors.
Objectives of the BTEC First suite

The BTEC First suite will:
enable you, as schools, colleges and training providers, to offer a high-quality
vocational and applied curriculum that is broad and engaging for all learners
secure a balanced curriculum overall, so learners in the 1419 age group have the
opportunity to apply their knowledge, skills and understanding in the context of
future development
provide learners with opportunities to link education and the world of work in
engaging, relevant and practical ways
enable learners to enhance their English and mathematical competence in
relevant, applied scenarios
support learners development of transferable interpersonal skills, including
working with others, problem-solving, independent study, and personal, learning
and thinking skills
provide learners with a route through education that has clear progression
pathways into further study or an apprenticeship.
INTRODUCTION
Breadth and progression

These qualifications have a core of underpinning knowledge, skills and
understanding, and a range of options to reflect the breadth of pathways within a
sector. This gives learners the opportunity to:
gain a broad understanding and knowledge of a vocational sector
investigate areas of specific interest
develop essential skills and attributes prized by employers, further education
colleges and higher education institutions.
This suite of qualifications provides opportunities for learners to progress to either
academic or more specialised vocational pathways.
Progression from Level 1

These qualifications have been designed to provide a progression route from the
following qualifications:
Edexcel BTEC Level 1 Certificate for IT Users (QCF)
Edexcel BTEC Level 1 Diploma for IT Users (QCF)
These qualifications are also designed to provide a progression route from the
following qualifications:
Edexcel BTEC Level 1 Certificate in Vocational Studies (QCF)
Edexcel BTEC Level 1 Diploma in Vocational Studies (QCF)
See website for details: http://www.edexcel.com/quals/flt/Voc-Studies/
Pages/default.aspx
INTRODUCTION
2 Key features of the Edexcel BTEC First

Certificate and Extended Certificate
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate:
are level 2 qualifications; the grades range from Level 2 PP to Level 2 D*D*.
Learners who do not achieve at Level 2 may be awarded a Level 1 grade. Learners
whose level of achievement is below a Level 1 will receive an Unclassified (U) result
are for learners aged 14 years and over
have core/mandatory units and optional specialist units
will be available on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF)
present knowledge in a work-related context
give learners the opportunity to develop and apply skills in English and
mathematics in naturally occurring, work-related contexts
provide opportunities for synoptic assessment. Learners will apply the skills
and knowledge gained from the core units when studying the optional specialist
units. See Annexe D for more detailed information.
Additionally, the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate:
is a 240-guided-learning-hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to two
GCSEs)
has 25 per cent of the qualification that is externally assessed. Edexcel sets and
marks these assessments.
Additionally, the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate:
is a 360-guided-learning-hour qualification (equivalent in teaching time to three
GCSEs)
has 162/3 per cent of the qualification that is externally assessed. Edexcel sets and
marks these assessments.
Learners can register for these BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate/Extended
Certificate qualifications from August 2012. The first certification opportunity for
these qualifications will be 2014.
Types of units within the qualifications

The BTEC First qualifications have core/mandatory and optional specialist units. See
Section 4 for more detailed information.
Core units
All qualification sizes in the sector share a common core of two compulsory units
totalling 60 guided learning hours (GLH).
Core units are designed to cover the body of content that employers and educators
within the sector consider essential for 1419 year old learners.
One unit will be internally assessed and one unit will be externally assessed.
Either one of the externally assessed units (Unit 1 or Unit 2) will contribute as one
of the core units along with Unit 3.
INTRODUCTION
Mandatory unit
Mandatory units assess additional knowledge, skills and understanding that are not
covered within the core units but that are essential to the curriculum area or
vocational sector for either the qualification size or sector.
The mandatory unit in these qualifications is a 30 GLH unit that is externally
assessed.
The remaining 30-guided-learning-hour externally assessed unit will act as the
mandatory unit and contribute to the overall grade score for the qualification.
Optional specialist units
The remainder of the qualifications in the sector will be formed from optional
specialist units.
Optional specialist units are sector specific, focus on a particular area within the
vocational sector and provide an opportunity to demonstrate knowledge, skills and
understanding.
Optional specialist units will normally be 30 GLH, but may be smaller or larger.
QUALIFICATION
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/

Level 2 First Certificate and
Extended Certificate in
Information and Creative
Technology
10
QUALIFICATION
3 Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First

Certificate and Extended Certificate in
The rationale for all the qualifications in the BTEC First suite is to:
inspire and enthuse learners to become technology savvy producers of
technology products and systems, rather than just consumers of them
give learners the opportunity to gain a broad understanding and knowledge of,
and skills in, the Information Technology sector and some aspects of the creative
industries, e.g. computer games development
allow for a flexible choice of units to meet the needs of learners with different
interests and inclinations by offering four different pathways
support progression to a more specialised level 3 vocational or academic
computing course, or to an Information Technology apprenticeship
give learners the potential opportunity, in due course, to enter employment within
a wide range of junior job roles across the Information Technology sector and
some aspects of the creative industries. Junior job roles include: Software
Engineer, Website Content Manager, Computer Animator, Help Desk Support
and Graphic Designer.
The revised title of the qualification reflects the emphasis on the creativity required
by learners to create/develop computer-based products or systems.
Within the suite, the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and
Extended Certificate in Information and Creative Technology qualifications
have been developed to meet the needs of learners with a range of educational
requirements. These include learners who:
wish to add breadth to their knowledge and understanding of the sector as part of
their career progression and development plans
have had some achievement in their Key Stage 4 programme and wish to top-up
their Level 2 achievement to progress to employment or other qualifications
are working towards achieving Level 2 English and/or Mathematics qualifications
in a post-16 setting and wish to complement their study programme with a
qualification that supports preparation for work or progression.
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate (240 GLH)
The core units form the fundamental knowledge and understanding of IT/computing
principles and, when completed, provide synoptic coverage of the qualification. In
addition, centres have the flexibility to select optional specialist units to reflect the
breadth of opportunity within the sector and enable further exploration of specific
areas of interest. These units combine to provide the following four pathways:
Information Technology (e.g. Unit 1: The Online World, Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio
and Unit 13: Database Development)
Computer science (e.g. Unit 2: Technology Systems, Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio and
Unit 12: Software Development)
Creative technology (e.g. Unit 1: The Online World, Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio,
Unit 5: Creating Digital Graphics, Unit 4: Creating Digital Animations)
Computer systems development and maintenance (e.g. Unit 1: The Online World,
Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio, Unit 11: Computer Networks)
11
QUALIFICATION
Learners have the opportunity to develop their skills, knowledge and understanding
in any one, or more, pathway(s) depending on their aspirations and motivations.
New units in the Certificate and Extended Certificate qualifications are:
Unit 14: Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware (60 GLH)
Unit 15: Installing and Maintaining Computer Software (60 GLH)
Unit 16: Automated Computer Systems (60 GLH)
Unit 17: Multimedia Products Development (60 GLH).
For learners taking the Certificate qualification, units 14, 15 and 16 provide
further fundamental skills, knowledge and understanding for the computer-systems
development and maintenance pathway. Unit 17 adds breadth to the creative
technology pathway and builds on the output from the four Creating Digital units
given in the Award. These four units also make some contribution to the computer
science pathway.
(See Annexe E for the structure of the Award).
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate (360 GLH)
Learners taking the Extended Certificate qualification, benefit from learning about
different types of IT and computing technology from across the different pathways.
Understanding how different IT and computing technologies interact and interrelate
provides learners with further opportunities for synoptic learning, which would benefit
their progression to level 3 and eventually into employment.
To indicate at a glance what is required as a result of undertaking the optional
specialist units we have used the following naming convention:
Unit titles containing the words Creating Digital (Units 4, 5, 6 and 7) involve making
computer-based product(s) that do not require a user interface.
Unit titles that include the word Development (Units 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, and 17) involve
making a computer-based product that does require a user interface.
Unit titles containing the word Computer (Units 11, 14, 15, 16) involve working with
both computer hardware devices and software to make/maintain a system.
The optional specialist units are either 30 GLH or 60 GLH. Most of the Development
units are 60 GLH, as they require, in addition to a user interface, more in-depth skills,
knowledge and understanding than the Creating Digital units, which are 30 GLH. There
are two exceptions to this as follows:
Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development is 30 GLH, so that it can be paired with one of the
Creating units in the Award to produce a simple app.
Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development is 30 GLH, as learners will probably already be
familiar with the software tool/techniques from Key Stage 3 and from the application
of spreadsheets across the curriculum.
All the Computer units are 60 GLH, owing to the complex nature of the technology,
which involves both computer hardware and software.
Note: The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate can
be taken as stand-alone qualifications or can be topped up from the Edexcel BTEC
Level 1/Level 2 Award in Information and Creative Technology with additional units
to make up the requisite number of guided learning hours. For details of the rules of
combination see page 15.
12
QUALIFICATION
Assessment approach
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate in Information
and Creative Technology include two externally assessed units in the core to introduce
externality into vocational programmes of study. This will assist learners as they progress
either into higher levels of vocational learning or to related academic qualifications, such
as GCSEs and GCEs.
The assessment approach for the internally assessed units in the qualification structure
enables learners to receive feedback on their progress throughout the course as they
provide evidence towards meeting the unit assessment criteria. These units include a
Digital Portfolio unit (Unit 3), which is assessed synoptically, and must include learners
work from all complete units from their course. Internally assessed units (optional
specialist units) provide a common approach to understanding existing technology
products/systems through investigation, and then allow learners to design, make
and review their own technology-based product or system.
Delivery strategies should reflect the nature of work within the IT sector by encouraging
learners to research and carry out assessment in the workplace, or in simulated working
conditions, wherever possible. It will be beneficial to learners to use locally available
vocational examples wherever possible, and for your centre to engage with local
employers for support and input. This allows a more realistic and motivating basis
for learning, and can start to ensure that learning serves the needs of local areas.
Learners should be encouraged to take responsibility for their own learning and
achievement, taking account of the industry standards for behaviour and performance.
Progression opportunities
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate in
Information and Creative Technology provides the knowledge, understanding and
skills for level 2 learners to progress to:
other level 2 vocational qualifications
level 3 qualifications, such as BTEC Nationals, specifically the Edexcel BTEC Level 3
in IT (QCF) or an IT/Creative Media apprenticeship
academic qualifications, such as GCE in ICT or Computing
employment within the information technology industry and/or areas within the
creative industries, such as developing computer animations.
Learners who achieve the qualification at Level 1 may progress to the Level 2
Certificate or Extended Certificate, or to academic or other vocational Level 2
qualifications.
Developing employability skills
One of the main purposes of BTEC qualifications is to help learners to progress
ultimately into employment. The vast majority of employers require learners to have
certain technical skills, knowledge and understanding to work in a particular sector,
but they are also looking for employability skills to ensure that employees are
effective in the workplace.
Unlike technical skills, which may become outdated over time, employability skills
enable learners to adapt to the ever-changing roles needed to survive in the global
economy. These skills include: self-management, team working, business awareness,
problem solving, communication, basic literacy and numeracy, a positive attitude to
work, and the use of IT.
13
QUALIFICATION
Throughout the BTEC First in Information and Creative Technology learners should
develop a range of employability skills. For example, across all the optional specialist
units learners develop:
project-/self-management and independent-learning skills, as each unit is an
individual project or forms part of a larger project
communication skills, such as when producing design documentation and when
obtaining evaluative feedback on products or systems produced
business awareness, as assignments are set in a vocational context.
Stakeholder support
The Edexcel BTEC First Level 1/Level 2 Certificate and Extended Certificate in Information
and Creative Technology reflect the needs of employers, further and higher education
representatives, and professional organisations. Key stakeholders were consulted during
the development of these qualifications.
14
QUALIFICATION
4 Qualification structure
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information
and Creative Technology
This qualification is taught over 240 guided learning hours (GLH). It has
core/mandatory and optional specialist units.
Learners must complete all the core/mandatory units, and a choice of optional
specialist units to reach a total of 240 GLH.
If a learner has already achieved a BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award qualification,
they may carry forward their unit results for use in larger BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First
qualifications within the same sector.
The units available in the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and
Creative Technology qualification are Units 1 to 13. Please see Annexe E for the
structure of the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and Creative
Technology qualification.
This BTEC First Certificate has units that your centre assesses (internal) and units
that Edexcel sets and marks (external).
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information and Creative
Technology
Unit
Core/mandatory units
Assessment
method
GLH
The Online World
External
30
Technology Systems
External
30
A Digital Portfolio
Internal
30

4
Creating Digital Animation
Internal
30
Creating Digital Audio
Internal
30
Creating Digital Graphics
Internal
30
Creating Digital Video
Internal
30
Mobile Apps Development
Internal
30
Spreadsheet Development
Internal
30
10
Database Development
Internal
60
11
Computer Networks
Internal
60
12
Software Development
Internal
60
13
Website Development
Internal
60
14
Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware
Internal
60
15
Installing and Maintaining Computer Software
Internal
60
16
Automated Computer Systems
Internal
60
17
Multimedia Products Development
Internal
60
15
QUALIFICATION
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in

This qualification is taught over 360 guided learning hours (GLH). It has
core/mandatory and optional specialist units.
Learners must complete all the core/mandatory units, and a choice of optional
If a learner has already achieved a BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award qualification,
they may carry forward their unit results for use in larger BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First
qualifications within the same sector.
The units available in the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and
Creative Technology qualification are Units 1 to 13. Please see Annexe E for the
structure of the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and Creative
Technology qualification.
This BTEC First Extended Certificate has units that your centre assesses (internal)
and units that Edexcel sets and marks (external).
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in Information and
Creative Technology
Unit
Core/Mandatory units
Assessment
method
GLH
The Online World
External
30
Technology Systems
External
30
A Digital Portfolio
Internal
30

4
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
10
Internal
60
11
Computer Networks
Internal
60
12
Internal
60
13
Website Development
Internal
60
14
Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware
Internal
60
15
Installing and Maintaining Computer Software
Internal
60
16
Internal
60
17
Internal
60
16
QUALIFICATION
5 Programme delivery
Edexcel does not define the mode of study for BTEC qualifications. Your centre is free
to offer the qualification using any mode of delivery (such as full-time, part-time,
evening only or distance learning) that meets your learners needs. As such, those
already employed in the information technology sector or some aspects of the
creative industries (such as working with computer animations) could study for the
BTEC First Certificate or Extended Certificate on a part-time basis, using industry
knowledge and expertise gained from the workplace to develop evidence towards
meeting the unit assessment criteria.
Whichever mode of delivery is used, your centre must ensure that learners have
appropriate access to the resources identified in the specification and to the subject
specialists who are delivering the units. This is particularly important for learners
studying for the qualification through open or distance learning.
When planning the programme, you should aim to enhance the vocational nature of
the qualification by:
using up-to-date and relevant teaching materials that make use of scenarios
and case studies that are relevant to the scope and variety of employment
opportunities available in the sector. These materials may be drawn from
workplace settings, where feasible
giving learners the opportunity to apply their learning through practical activities
to be found in the workplace, for example by developing a website for a small
business
including employers in the delivery of the programme. You may, for example,
want to invite guest speakers from a range of local employers working in both
the information technology sector and appropriate parts of the creative industries,
e.g. software businesses developing computer games, enabling learners to gain an
insight into the world of work
liaising with employers to make sure a course is relevant to learners specific
needs. You may, for example, wish to seek an employers help in stressing the
importance of English and mathematics skills and of wider skills, such as team
work.
Resources
As part of the approval process, your centre must make sure that the resource
requirements below are in place before offering the qualifications.
Centres must have appropriate physical resources (for example, equipment, IT,
learning materials, teaching rooms) to support the delivery and assessment of the
qualifications.
Staff involved in the assessment process must have relevant expertise and/or
occupational experience.
There must be systems in place to ensure continuing professional development for
staff delivering the qualifications.
Centres must have appropriate health-and-safety policies in place relating to the
use of equipment by learners.
Centres must deliver the qualifications in accordance with current equality
legislation.
Your centre should refer to the Teacher guidance section in individual units to
check for any specific resources required.
17
QUALIFICATION
Delivery approach
Your approach to teaching and learning should support the specialist vocational
nature of BTEC First qualifications. These BTEC Firsts give a balance of practical skill
development, understanding, and knowledge requirements, some of which can be
theoretical in nature.
Instruction in the classroom is only part of the learning process. You need to
reinforce the links between the theory and practical application, and make sure that
the knowledge base is relevant and up to date, by using teaching methods and
materials that allow learners to apply their learning to actual events and activities
within the sector. Maximum use should be made of the learners experience where
relevant, for example, by encouraging them to reflect on their own experience of
work or the experiences of family and friends.
One of the important aspects of your approach to delivery should be to instil into
learners who have a limited experience of the world of work some insights into the
daily activities that are met in the vocational area being studied. It is suggested that
the delivery of the BTEC First Certificate and Extended Certificate can be enriched
and extended by the use of learning materials, classroom exercises and internal
assessments that draw on current practice in and any experience of the qualification
sector being studied. This may draw on the use of:
vocationally specific workplace case-study materials
visiting speakers, and the assistance of local employers
visits by learners to local workplaces
inviting relevant parents or contacts to come to speak to the learners about their
involvement in information technology and creative industries at different levels
and in different ways
asking a local employer to set learners a problem-solving activity to be carried out
in groups.

Your learners have opportunities to develop personal, learning and thinking skills
(PLTS) within a sector-related context. See Annexe A for detailed information about
PLTS, and mapping to the units in this specification.
English and mathematics knowledge and skills

It is likely that learners will be working towards English and mathematics
qualifications at Key Stage 4 or above. These BTEC First qualifications provide further
opportunity to enhance and reinforce skills in English and mathematics in naturally
occurring, relevant, work-related contexts.
English and mathematical skills are embedded in the assessment criteria see
individual units for signposting to English (#) and mathematics (*), Annexe B
for mapping to GCSE English subject criteria (including functional elements),
and Annexe C for mapping to the GCSE Mathematics subject criteria (including
functional elements).
18
QUALIFICATION
6 Access and recruitment

Our policy regarding access to our qualifications is that:
they should be available to everyone who is capable of reaching the required
standards
they should be free from any barriers that restrict access and progression
there should be equal opportunities for all those wishing to access the
qualifications.
These are qualifications aimed at level 2 learners. Your centre is required to recruit
learners to BTEC First qualifications with integrity.
You need to make sure that applicants have relevant information and advice about
the qualifications to make sure they meet their needs.
Your centre should review the applicants prior qualifications and/or experience to
consider whether this profile shows that they have the potential to achieve the
qualifications.
For learners with disabilities and specific needs, this review will need to take account
of the support available to the learner during the teaching and assessment of the
qualifications.
Prior knowledge, skills and understanding

Learners do not need to achieve any other qualifications before registering for a
BTEC First.
Learners are expected to be familiar with the content of the Key Stage 3 Programme
of Study for ICT.
Learners may top up from the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in
Information and Creative Technology to the Certificate or Extended Certificate
qualifications. See the information manual for further details.
Please see Annexe E for the structure of the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in
Information and Creative Technology qualification.
Access to qualifications for learners with disabilities

or specific needs
Equality and fairness are central to our work. Our equality policy requires that
all learners should have equal opportunity to access our qualifications and
assessments, and that our qualifications are awarded in a way that is fair to
every learner.
We are committed to making sure that:
learners with a protected characteristic (as defined by the Equality Act 2010)
are not, when they are undertaking one of our qualifications, disadvantaged in
comparison to learners who do not share that characteristic
all learners achieve the recognition they deserve for undertaking a qualification
and that this achievement can be compared fairly to the achievement of their
peers.
You can find details on how to make adjustments for learners with protected
characteristics in the policy document Access arrangements, reasonable adjustments
and special considerations, which is on our website, www.edexcel.com/Policies
19
QUALIFICATION
7 The layout of units in the specification

Each unit is laid out using the headings given below. Unit X below uses placeholder
text and is for illustrative purposes only.
Unit title
The title reflects the
content of the unit.
Level
All units and
qualifications have
a level assigned to
them that represents
the level of
achievement. The
National Qualifications
Framework level
descriptors and
similar qualifications
at this level inform
the allocation of the
unit level.
Unit type
This shows if the unit
is core/mandatory or
optional specialist.
Guided learning
hours
All units have guided
learning hours
assigned to them.
This is the time when
you (as a teacher,
tutor, trainer or
facilitator) are
present to give
specific guidance to
learners on the unit
content.
20
Assessment type
Unit introduction
Learning aims
Units are either

internally or
externally assessed.
Your centre designs
and assesses the
internal assessments.
Edexcel sets and
marks the external
assessments.
The unit introduction

is addressed to the
learner and gives the
learner a snapshot of
the purpose of the
unit.
The learning aims are

statements indicating
the scope of learning
for the unit. They
provide a holistic
overview of the unit
when considered
alongside the unit
content.
QUALIFICATION
Learning aims and unit content

The unit content gives the basis for the teaching, learning and assessment for each learning aim.
Topic headings are given, where appropriate.
Content covers:
knowledge, including definition of breadth and depth

skills, including definition of qualities or contexts
applications or activities, through which knowledge and/or skills are evidenced.
Content should normally be treated as compulsory for teaching the unit. Definition of content
sometimes includes examples prefixed with e.g.. These are provided as examples and centres
may use all or some of these, or bring in additional material, as relevant.
Assessment
criteria
The assessment
criteria determine
the minimum
standard required
by the learner to
achieve the relevant
grade. The learner
must provide
sufficient and valid
evidence to achieve
the grade.
21
QUALIFICATION
Teacher guidance
While the main
content of the unit
is addressed to the
learner, this section
gives you additional
guidance and
amplification to aid
your understanding
and to ensure a
consistent level
of assessment.
Resources identifies
any special resources
required for learners
to show evidence of
the assessment. Your
centre must make
sure that any
requirements are in
place when it seeks
approval from Edexcel
to offer the
qualification.
Assessment guidance gives examples of the quality

of work needed to differentiate the standard of work
submitted. It also offers suggestions for creative and
innovative ways in which learners can produce evidence
to meet the criteria. The guidance highlights approaches
and strategies for developing appropriate evidence.
Suggested
assignment
outlines gives
examples of
possible
assignment ideas.
These are not
mandatory. Your
centre is free to
adapt them, or
you can design
your own
assignment tasks.
22
QUALIFICATION
8 Internal assessment
Language of assessment
Assessment of the internal and external units for these qualifications will be available
in English. All learner work must be in English.
A learner taking the qualifications may be assessed in British or Irish Sign Language
where it is permitted for the purpose of reasonable adjustment.
Summary of internal assessment

The majority of the units in these qualifications are assessed through internal
assessment, which means that you can deliver the programme in a way that suits
your learners and relates to local need. The way in which you deliver the programme
must also ensure that assessment is fair and that standards are nationally consistent
over time.
To achieve this, it is important that you:
plan the assessment of units to fit with delivery, allowing for the linkages
between units
write suitable assessments (for example, assignments, projects or case studies)
or select assessments from available resources, adapting them as necessary
plan the assessment for each unit in terms of when it will be authorised by the
Lead Internal Verifier, when it will be used and assessed, and how long it will take
ensure each assessment is fit for purpose, valid, will deliver reliable assessment
outcomes across assessors, and is authorised before use
provide preparation and support for learners only during the formative assessment
phase
make careful and consistent assessment decisions based only on the defined
assessment criteria and unit requirements
validate and record assessment decisions carefully and completely
work closely with Edexcel to ensure that your implementation, delivery and
assessment is consistent with national standards.
Assessment and verification roles

There are three key roles involved in implementing assessment processes in your
school or college, namely:
Lead Internal Verifier
Internal Verifier the need for an Internal Verifier or Internal Verifiers in addition
to the Lead Internal Verifier is dependent on the size of the programme in terms
of assessment locations, number of Assessors and optional paths taken. Further
guidance can be obtained from your Regional Quality Manager or Centre Quality
Reviewer if you are unsure about the requirements for your centre
Assessor.
23
QUALIFICATION
The Lead Internal Verifier must be registered with Edexcel and is required to train
and standardise Assessors and Internal Verifiers using materials provided by Edexcel
that demonstrate the application of standards. In addition, the Lead Internal Verifier
should provide general support. The Lead Internal Verifier:
has overall responsibility for the programme assessment plan, including the
duration of assessment, assessment opportunities and completion of verification
can be responsible for more than one programme
ensures that there are valid assessment instruments for each unit in the
programme
ensures that relevant assessment documentation is available and used for
each unit
is responsible for the standardisation of Assessors and Internal Verifiers using
Edexcel-approved materials
authorises individual assessments as fit for purpose
checks samples of assessment decisions by individual Assessors and Internal
Verifiers to validate that standards are being correctly applied
ensures the implementation of all general assessment policies developed by the
centre for BTEC qualifications
has responsibility for ensuring learner work is authenticated
liaises with Edexcel, including the Edexcel Standards Verifier.
Internal Verifiers must oversee all assessment activity to make sure that individual
Assessors do not misinterpret the specification or undertake assessment that is not
consistent with the national standard in respect of level, content or duration of
assessment. The process for ensuring that assessment is being conducted correctly
is called internal verification. Normally, a programme team will work together with
individuals being both Assessors and Internal Verifiers, with the team leader or
programme manager often being the registered Lead Internal Verifier.
Internal Verifiers must make sure that assessment is fully validated within your
centre by:
checking every assessment instrument carefully and endorsing it before it is used
ensuring that each learner is assessed carefully and thoroughly using only the
relevant assessment criteria and associated guidance within the specification
ensuring the decisions of every Assessor for each unit at all grades and for all
learners are in line with national standards.
Assessors make assessment decisions and must be standardised using Edexcelapproved materials before making any assessment decisions. They are usually the
teachers within your school or college, but the term Assessor refers to the specific
responsibility for carrying out assessment and making sure that it is done in a way
that is correct and consistent with national standards. Assessors may also draft or
adapt internal assessment instruments.
You are required as a centre to keep records of assessment and have assessment
authorised by Edexcel. The main records are:
the overall plan of delivery and assessment, showing the duration of assessment
and the timeline for internal verification
assessment instruments, which are authorised through an Internal Verifier
assessment records, which contain the assessment decisions for each learner for
each unit
24
QUALIFICATION
an internal verification sampling plan, which shows how assessment decisions are
checked, and that must include across the sample all Assessors, unit assessment
locations and learners
internal verification records, which show the outcomes of sampling activity as set
out in the sampling plan.
Learner preparation
Internal assessment is the main form of assessment for these qualifications,
so preparing your learners for it is very important because they:
must be prepared for and motivated to work consistently and independently to
achieve the requirements of the qualifications
need to understand how they will be assessed and the importance of timescales
and deadlines
need to appreciate fully that all the work submitted for assessment must be
their own.
You will need to provide learners with an induction and a guide or handbook to cover:
the purpose of the assessment briefs for learning and assessment
the relationship between the tasks given for assessment and the grading criteria
the concept of vocational and work-related learning
how learners can develop responsibility for their own work and build their
vocational and employability skills
how they should use and reference source materials, including what would
constitute plagiarism.
Designing assessment instruments

An assessment instrument is any kind of activity or task that is developed for the
sole purpose of assessing learning against the learning aims. When you develop
assessment instruments you will often be planning them as a way to develop
learners skills and understanding. However, they must be fit for purpose as a tool to
measure learning against the defined content and assessment criteria to ensure your
final assessment decisions meet the national standard.
You should make sure that assessment tasks and activities enable learners to
produce valid, sufficient, authentic and appropriate evidence that relates directly to
the specified criteria within the context of the learning aims and unit content. You
need to ensure that the generation of evidence is carefully monitored, controlled and
produced in an appropriate timescale. This will help you to make sure that learners
are achieving to the best of their ability and at the same time that the evidence is
genuinely their own.
An assessment that is fit for purpose and suitably controlled is one in which:
the tasks that the learner is asked to complete will provide evidence for a learning
aim that can be assessed using the assessment criteria
the assessment instrument gives clear instructions to the learner about what they
are required to do
the time allowed for the assessment is clearly defined and consistent with what is
being assessed
25
QUALIFICATION
you have the required resources for all learners to complete the assignment fully
and fairly
the evidence the assignment will generate will be authentic and individual to
the learner
the evidence can be documented to show that the assessment and verification has
been carried out correctly.
You may develop assessments that cover a whole unit, parts of a unit or several
units, provided that all units and their associated learning aims are fully addressed
through the programme overall. A learning aim must be covered completely in an
assessment. However, a learning aim can be included in more than one assessment.
When you give an assessment to learners, it must include:
a clear title and/or reference so that the learner knows which assessment it is
the unit(s) and learning aim(s) being addressed
a scenario, context, brief or application for the task
task(s) that enable the generation of evidence that can be assessed against the
assessment criteria
details of the evidence that the learner must produce
clear timings and deadlines for carrying out tasks and providing evidence.
Your assessment tasks should enable the evidence generated to be judged against
the full range of assessment criteria; it is important the learners are given the
opportunity for stretch and challenge.
The units include guidance on appropriate approaches to assessment. A central
feature of vocational assessment is that it should be:
current, i.e. it reflects the most recent developments and issues
local, i.e. it reflects the employment context of your area
flexible, i.e. it allows you as a centre to deliver the programme, making best
use of the vocational resources that you have
consistent with national standards, with regard to the level of demand.
Your centre should use the assessment guidance within units along with your
local resource availability and guidance to develop appropriate assessments.
It is acceptable to use and adapt resources to meet learner needs and the local
employment context.
You need to make sure that the type of evidence generated fits with the unit
requirement, that it is vocational in nature, and that the context in which the
assessment is set is in line with unit assessment guidance and content. For many
units, this will mean providing for the practical demonstration of skills. For many
learning aims, you will be able to select an appropriate vocational format for
evidence generation, such as:
written reports, graphs, posters
projects, project plans
time-constrained practical assessments
audio-visual recordings of portfolio, sketchbook, a working logbook, etc
presentations.
26
QUALIFICATION
Authenticity and authentication

You can accept only evidence for assessment that is authentic, i.e. that is the
learners own and that can be judged fully to see whether it meets the assessment
criteria.
You should ensure that authenticity is considered when setting assignments. For
example, ensuring that each learner has a different focus for research will reduce
opportunities for copying or collaboration. On some occasions it will be useful to
include supervised production of evidence. Where appropriate, practical activities or
performance observed by the Assessor should be included.
Learners must authenticate the evidence that they provide for assessment. They
do this by signing a declaration stating that it is their own work when they submit it.
For practical or performance tasks observed by the Assessor this is not necessary.
Your Assessors should assess only learner evidence that is authentic. If they find
through the assessment process that some or all of the evidence is not authentic,
they need to take appropriate action, including invoking malpractice policies as
required.
It is important that all evidence can be validated through verification. This means
that it must be capable of being reassessed in full by another person. When you are
using practical and performance evidence, you need to think about how supporting
evidence can be captured through using, for example, videos, recordings,
photographs, handouts, task sheets etc.
The authentication of learner evidence is the responsibility of your centre. If
during external sampling an Edexcel Standards Verifier raises concerns about
the authenticity of evidence, your centre will be required to investigate further.
Depending on the outcomes, penalties may be applied. At the end of this section,
you can find an example of a template that can be used to record the declaration of
learners in relation to the authenticity of the evidence presented for assessment.
Applying criteria to internal assessments

Each unit and learning aim has specified assessment criteria. Your centre should use
these criteria for assessing the quality of the evidence provided. This determines the
grade awarded.
The assessment criteria are not a set of sequential activities but a way of making a
judgement. For example, if a Level 2 Pass specifies a description and a Merit an
analysis, these do not require two different activities but rather one activity through
which some learners will provide only description evidence and others will also
provide analysis evidence.
The assessment criteria are hierarchical. A learner can achieve a Merit only if they
provide sufficient evidence for the Level 2 Pass and Merit criteria. Similarly, a learner
can achieve a Distinction only if they give sufficient evidence for the Level 2 Pass,
Merit and Distinction criteria.
A summative unit grade is awarded after all opportunities for achievement are given.
A learner must achieve all the assessment criteria for that grade. Therefore:
to achieve a Level 2 Distinction a learner must have satisfied all the Distinction criteria
in a way that encompasses all the Level 2 Pass, Merit and Distinction criteria, providing
evidence of performance of outstanding depth, quality or application
to achieve a Level 2 Merit a learner must have satisfied all the Merit criteria in a
way that encompasses all the Level 2 Pass and Merit criteria, providing
performance of enhanced depth or quality
27
QUALIFICATION
to achieve a Level 2 Pass a learner must have satisfied all the Level 2 Pass criteria,
showing breadth of coverage of the required unit content and having relevant
knowledge, understanding and skills
a learner can be awarded a Level 1 if all the level 1 criteria are fully met. The
award of Level 1 is not achieved through a failure to meet the Level 2 Pass criteria.
A learner who does not achieve all the assessment criteria at level 1 has not passed
the unit and should be given a U (Unclassified).
A learner must achieve all the defined learning aims to pass the internally assessed
units. There is no compensation within the unit.
Assessment decisions
Your assessment plan will set a clear timeline for assessment decisions to be
reached. During the time the assessment is being undertaken, learners can be given
guidance, information, resources and feedback on progress.
After the final assignment is submitted, an assessment decision must be given.
An assessment decision:
must be made with reference to the assessment criteria
should record how it has been reached, indicating how or where criteria have
been achieved
may indicate why attainment against criteria has not been demonstrated.
Your Internal Verifiers and Assessors must work together to ensure that assessment
decisions are reached promptly and validated before they are given to the learner.
Late submission
You should encourage learners to understand the importance of deadlines and of
handing work in on time. For assessment purposes it is important that learners are
assessed fairly and consistently according to the assessment plan that the Lead
Internal Verifier has authorised and that some learners are not advantaged by
having additional time to complete assignments. You are not required to accept
for assessment work that was not completed by the date in the assessment plan.
Learners may be given authorised extensions for legitimate reasons, such as illness
at the time of submission. If you accept a late completion by a learner, the evidence
should be assessed normally, unless it is judged to not meet the requirements for
authenticity. It is not appropriate, however, to give automatic downgrades on
assessment decisions as punishment for late submission.
Opportunities to retake assessments

Summative assessment is the culmination of the learning and assessment process.
You should make sure that learners have sufficient learning and preparation before
undertaking assessment. Formative feedback during an assessment window will help
a learner demonstrate attainment to the best of their abilities.
A learner may be given one opportunity to retake a completed assessment after
a summative grade has been given. Your centre will need to provide a specific
assessment opportunity that is authorised by the Lead Internal Verifier. You should
make arrangements for retaking the assessment in such a way that does not
adversely affect other assessments and does not give the learner an unfair
28
QUALIFICATION
advantage over other learners. You need to consider how the further assessment
opportunity ensures that assessment remains fit for purpose and in line with the
original requirements.
The centre may conduct a retake under supervised conditions even if this was not
necessary for the original assessment.
As a centre you need to be fair to all learners in the way in which you provide
opportunities to retake assessments, and you are not required to make an
opportunity available if your learner has not taken full advantage of the first
assessment opportunity and formative assessment process.
The original evidence for assessment may remain valid and can be extended,
or it may need to be replaced partially or in full. The learner must not have
further teacher guidance and support in producing further evidence.
The Edexcel Standards Verifier is likely to want to include assessments that have
been re-submitted as part of the sample they will review.
Appeals
Your centre must have a policy for dealing with appeals from learners. These
appeals may relate to assessment decisions being incorrect or assessment not
being conducted fairly. The first step in such a policy would be a consideration of the
evidence by a Lead Internal Verifier or other member of the programme team. The
assessment plan should allow time for potential appeals after assessment decisions
have been given to learners.
If there is an appeal by a learner you must document the appeal and its resolution.
Dealing with malpractice

Your centre must have a policy for dealing with potential malpractice by learners.
Your policy must follow the Edexcel Assessment Malpractice policy. You must report
serious malpractice to Edexcel, particularly if any units have been subject to quality
assurance or certification.
Reasonable adjustments to assessment

You are able to make adjustments to assessments to take account of the needs
of individual learners in line with Edexcels Reasonable Adjustments and Special
Considerations policy. In most instances this can be achieved simply by application
of the policy, for example to extend time or adjust the format of evidence. We can
advise you if you are uncertain as to whether an adjustment is fair and reasonable.
Special consideration
You must operate special consideration in line with Edexcels Reasonable Adjustments
and Special Considerations policy. You can provide special consideration only in the
time given for evidence to be provided or for the format of the assessment if it is
equally valid. You may not substitute alternative forms of evidence to that required
in a unit, or omit the application of any assessment criteria to judge attainment.
Edexcel can consider applications for special consideration in line with the policy.
29
QUALIFICATION
(Exemplar for centres)
Learner Assessment Submission and Declaration

This sheet must be completed by the learner and provided for work
submitted for assessment.
Learner name:
Assessor name:
Date issued:
Completion date:
Submitted on:
Qualification:
Assessment reference and title:
Please list the evidence submitted for each task. Indicate the page numbers where
the evidence can be found or describe the nature of the evidence (e.g. video,
illustration).
Task ref.
Evidence submitted
Page numbers or
description
Comments for note by the Assessor:
Learner declaration
I certify that the work submitted for this assignment is my own. I have clearly referenced
any sources used in the work. I understand that false declaration is a form
of malpractice.
Learner signature:
Date:
_________________________________________________________________
30
QUALIFICATION
9 External assessment
Externally assessed units have the same grades as internally assessed units:
Level 2 Pass, Merit, Distinction
Level 1
Unclassified.
The table below shows the type of external assessment and assessment availability
for these qualifications.
Type of
external
assessment
This unit is externally assessed using an onscreen test.
Length of
assessment
The external assessment will be 1 hour.
No. of marks
50 marks
Assessment
availability
On-demand
First
assessment
availability
June 2013
Edexcel sets and marks the test.

The assessment must be taken by the learner under examination
conditions.

Type of
external
assessment
This unit is externally assessed using an onscreen test.
Length of
assessment
The external assessment will be 1 hour.
No. of marks
50 marks
Assessment
availability
On demand
First
assessment
availability
June 2013
Edexcel sets and marks the test.

The assessment must be taken by the learner under examination
conditions.
Your centre needs to make sure that learners are:

fully prepared to sit the external assessment
entered for assessments at appropriate times, with due regard for resit
opportunities as necessary.
Sample assessment materials will be available to help centres prepare learners for
assessment. Specific arrangements for external assessment are available before the
start of each academic year on our website www.edexcel.com
31
QUALIFICATION
Grade descriptors for the internal and external units

Internal units
Each internally assessed unit has specific assessment criteria that your centre must
use to judge learner work in order to arrive at a grading decision for the unit as a
whole. For internally assessed units, the assessor judges the evidence that the
learner has presented to determine whether it meets all the relevant criteria, and
then awards a grade at the appropriate level.
The criteria are arrived at with reference to the following grading characteristics:
applying knowledge and understanding in vocational and realistic contexts, with
reference to relevant concepts and processes, to achieve tasks, produce outcomes
and review the success of outcomes
developing and applying practical and technical skills, acting with increasing
independence to select and apply skills through processes and with effective use
of resources to achieve, explain and review the success of intended outcomes
developing generic skills for work through management of self, working in a team,
the use of a variety of relevant communication and presentation skills, and the
development of critical thinking skills relevant to vocational contexts.
External units
The externally assessed units are assessed using a marks-based scheme. For each
external assessment, grade boundaries, based on learner performance, will be set by
the awarding organisation.
The following criteria are used in the setting and awarding of the external units.
Level 2 Pass
Learners will be able to recall and apply knowledge of information technology and
creative technology. They will have a sound knowledge of key terms, processes,
computer hardware and computer software, and will be able to apply their knowledge
and understanding appropriately. They will be able to define and communicate key
aspects of technical knowledge, selecting appropriate actions in more simple and
familiar contexts. They will be able to relate their knowledge and understanding to
vocational contexts, making some decisions on valid application and impact.
Level 2 Distinction
Learners will be able to synthesise knowledge of information technology and creative
technology, bringing together understanding of their uses and limitations and
applying them to sometimes complex contexts in defined vocational scenarios. They
show depth of knowledge of the technical components of computing systems and
relevant process. Learners understand how and when to use their knowledge in
different situations, being able to make effective judgements based on analysis of
given information. They are able to analyse information and data, selecting the most
relevant concepts and making valid decisions about the selection and application of
systems and software. They can judge the consequences of effective and ineffective
uses of computer systems and software, and make recommendations on solutions
and future actions. They can compare methods and approaches used to construct,
use and apply computer systems, and evaluate alternatives against defined criteria.
32
QUALIFICATION
10 Awarding and reporting for the

qualification
The awarding and certification of these qualifications will comply with the
requirements of the Office of Qualifications and Examinations Regulation (Ofqual).
Calculation of the qualification grade

These qualifications are level 2 qualifications, and the certification for each
qualification may show a grade ranging from Level 2 PP to Level 2 D*D*. (Please
refer to the Calculation of qualification grade table for the full list of grades.)
If these are not achieved, a Level 1 grade may be awarded. Learners whose level of
achievement is below a Level 1 will receive an Unclassified (U) result.
The qualification grade is calculated on the basis of grades in individual units. Each
unit will be awarded a grade of Level 2 Pass, Level 2 Merit, Level 2 Distinction or
Level 1. Learners whose level of achievement is below a Level 1 will receive an
Unclassified (U) for that unit. There is no unit grade of D*; grades of D*D and D*D*
can be awarded as an aggregated grade for the qualification based on the learners
overall performance. In order to achieve this grade, learners will have to
demonstrate a strong performance across the qualification as a whole.
To achieve a level 2 qualification, learners must:
complete and report an outcome for all units within the permitted combination
(NB Unclassified is a permitted unit outcome), and
have sufficient points across Unit 3 and either Unit 1 or Unit 2, i.e. a minimum of
24 points, and
achieve the minimum number of points at a grade threshold from the permitted
combination. (See the Calculation of qualification grade table. For comparison,
the table includes all qualification sizes in the suite.)
Learners who do not achieve a Level 2 may be entitled to achieve a Level 1 where they:
complete and report an outcome for all units within the permitted combination
(NB Unclassified is a permitted unit outcome), and
have sufficient points across Unit 3 and either Unit 1 or Unit 2, i.e. a minimum of
12 points, and
achieve the minimum number of points for a Level 1. (See the Calculation of
qualification grade table. For comparison, the table includes all qualification sizes
in the suite.)
Learners who fail to reach the minimum standard for a Level 1 to be awarded will be
recorded as Unclassified (U) and will not be certificated.
It is the responsibility of a centre to ensure that the correct unit combination is
adhered to.
Learners who do not achieve sufficient points for the Certificate or Extended
Certificate qualifications may be eligible to achieve the Award provided they have
sufficient points across the core units, have completed the correct combination of
units and meet the appropriate qualification grade points threshold.
The Calculation of qualification grade table provides centres with guidance on the performance levels expected
for the award of individual grades. Grade thresholds may be reviewed based on unit grade performance.
33
QUALIFICATION
Please see Annexe E for the structure of the BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in
Information and Creative Technology qualification and the latest version of the
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and Creative Technology
specification on our website (www.edexcel.com).
Points available for unit size and grades
The table below shows the number of points scored per 10 guided learning
hours at each grade.
Points per grade per 10 guided learning hours
Unclassified
Level 1
Level 2
Pass (P)
Level 2
Merit (M)
Level 2
Distinction (D)
Edexcel will automatically calculate the qualification grade for your learners when
your learner unit grades are submitted. Learners will be awarded qualification grades
for achieving the sufficient number of points within the ranges shown in the
Calculation of qualification grade table.
Example:
A learner achieves a Level 2 Pass grade for a unit. The unit size is 30 guided learning
hours (GLH). Therefore they gain 12 points for that unit, i.e. 4 points for each
10 GLH, therefore 12 points for 30 GLH.
34
24
48
66
84
90
Level 1
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Level 2
Distinction
Level 2
Distinction*
174
180
Level 2
D*D*
168
Level 2 DD
Level 2 D*D
150
132
Level 2 MM
Level 2 DM
114
96
Level 2 PP
Level 2 MP
48
Points
threshold
Level 1
Grade
276
Level 2
D*D*
264
234
204
174
144
72
Points
threshold
270
Level 2 DD
Level 2 DM
Level 2 MM
Level 2 MP
Level 2 PP
Level 1
Grade
(360 GLH)
Level 2 D*D
Points
threshold
(240 GLH)
(120 GLH)
Grade
Certificate
Award
Calculation of qualification grade
QUALIFICATION
366
372
Level 2
D*D*
360
318
276
234
192
96
35
Points
threshold
Level 2 D*D
Level 2 DD
Level 2 DM
Level 2 MM
Level 2 MP
Level 2 PP
Level 1
Grade
(480 GLH)
Diploma
QUALIFICATION
The tables below give examples of how the overall grade is determined. Numbering is
for illustrative purposes only.
Example 1
Achievement of a Certificate with a Level 2 MM grade
GLH
Weighting
(GLH/10)
Grade
Grade
points
Points per unit

(weighting
grade points)
Unit 1
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 2
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 3
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 4
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 5
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 6
30
Level 2 Pass
12
60
Level 2 Distinction
240
24
Unit 7
Qualification
grade totals
Level 2 MM
The learner
has more
than sufficient
points across
the core units
to be
considered for
a Level 2
48
144
The learner has sufficient points

for a Level 2 MM grade
Example 2
Achievement of a Certificate with a Level 2 D*D grade
GLH
Weighting
(GLH/10)
Grade
Grade
points
Points per unit

(weighting
grade points)
Unit 1
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 2
30
Level 2 Distinction
24
Unit 3
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 4
30
Level 2 Distinction
24
Unit 5
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 6
30
Level 2 Distinction
24
Unit 7
60
Level 2 Distinction
48
240
24
Qualification
grade totals
Level 2 D*D
The learner
has more
than sufficient
points across
the core units
to be
considered for
a Level 2
174

for a Level 2 D*D grade.
36
QUALIFICATION
Example 3
Achievement of an Extended Certificate with a Level 2 MP grade
GLH
Weighting
(GLH/10)
Grade
Grade
points
Points per unit

(weighting
grade points)
Unit 1
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 2
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 3
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 4
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 5
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 6
30
Level 2 Distinction
24
Unit 7
60
Level 2 Pass
24
Unit 8
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 9
30
Level 2 Merit
18
60
Level 2 Pass
360
36
Level 2 MP
Unit 10
Qualification
grade totals
The learner
has sufficient
points across
the core units
to be
considered for
a Level 2
24
180

for a Level 2 MP grade.
Example 4
Achievement of an Extended Certificate at Level 1 but a Level 2 PP grade points
total
GLH
Weighting
(GLH/10)
Grade
Grade
points
Points per unit

(weighting
grade points)
Unit 1
30
Unclassified
Unit 2
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 3
30
Level 1
Unit 4
30
Level 2 Pass
12
Unit 5
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 6
30
Level 2 Distinction
24
Unit 7
60
Level 2 Pass
24
Unit 8
30
Level 2 Merit
18
Unit 9
30
Level 2 Merit
18
60
Level 2 Merit
360
36
Unit 10
Qualification
grade totals
Level 1
The learner
has not
achieved
sufficient
points across
the core units
to achieve a
Level 2 but
has sufficient
points to be
considered for
a Level 1.
36
168
Although the learner has gained a significant number of points,

they will achieve a Level 1 as they did not gain sufficient points
across the core units for a Level 2 grade.
37
QUALIFICATION
11 Quality assurance of centres

Edexcel will produce on an annual basis the BTEC Quality Assurance Handbook,
which will contain detailed guidance on the quality processes required to underpin
robust assessment and internal verification.
The key principles of quality assurance are that:
a centre delivering BTEC programmes must be an approved centre, and must have
approval for the programmes or groups of programmes that it is delivering
the centre agrees, as part of gaining approval, to abide by specific terms and
conditions around the effective delivery and quality assurance of assessment;
it must abide by these conditions throughout the period of delivery
Edexcel makes available to approved centres a range of materials and
opportunities, through online standardisation, intended to exemplify the processes
required for effective assessment, and examples of effective standards. Approved
centres must use the materials and services to ensure that all staff delivering BTEC
qualifications keep up to date with the guidance on assessment
an approved centre must follow agreed protocols for standardisation of assessors
and verifiers, for the planning, monitoring and recording of assessment processes,
and for dealing with special circumstances, appeals and malpractice.
The approach of quality-assured assessment is through a partnership between
an approved centre and Edexcel. We will make sure that each centre follows best
practice and employs appropriate technology to support quality-assurance processes,
where practicable. We work to support centres and seek to make sure that our
quality-assurance processes do not place undue bureaucratic processes on centres.
We monitor and support centres in the effective operation of assessment and quality
assurance. The methods we use to do this for BTEC First programmes include:
making sure that all centres complete appropriate declarations at the time of
approval
undertaking approval visits to centres
making sure that centres have effective teams of assessors and verifiers who are
trained to undertake assessment
assessment sampling and verification, through requested samples of assessments,
completed assessed learner work and associated documentation
an overarching review and assessment of a centres strategy for assessing and
quality assuring its BTEC programmes.
An approved centre must make certification claims only when authorised by us and
strictly in accordance with requirements for reporting.
Centres that do not fully address and maintain rigorous approaches to quality
assurance cannot seek certification for individual programmes or for all BTEC First
programmes. Centres that do not comply with remedial action plans may have their
approval to deliver qualifications removed.
38
QUALIFICATION
12 Further information and useful

publications
For further information about the qualifications featured in this specification, or other
Edexcel qualifications, please call Customer Services on 0844 576 0026 (calls may be
monitored for quality and training purposes) or visit our website (www.edexcel.com).
Related information and publications include:
Equality Policy
Information Manual (updated annually)
Access arrangements, reasonable adjustments and special considerations
Quality Assurance Handbook (updated annually)
o Publications on the quality assurance of BTEC qualifications are on our website at
www.btec.co.uk/keydocuments
Our publications catalogue lists all the material available to support our qualifications.
To access the catalogue and order publications, please go to www.edexcel.com/resources
Additional documentation
Additional materials include:
Sample Assessment Material (for the external units)
A guide to Getting Started with BTEC
Guides to our support for planning, delivery and assessment (including sample
assignment briefs).
Visit www.btec.co.uk/2012 for more information.
Additional resources
If you need to source further learning and teaching material to support planning and
delivery for your learners, there is a wide range of BTEC resources available to you.
Any publisher can seek endorsement for their resources, and, if they are successful,
we will list their BTEC resources on our website www.edexcel.com/resources
39
QUALIFICATION
13 Professional development and support

Edexcel supports UK and international customers with training related to BTEC
qualifications. This support is available through a choice of training options offered in
our published training directory, or through customised training at your centre.
The support we offer focuses on a range of issues including:
planning for the delivery of a new programme
planning for assessment and grading
developing effective assignments
building your team and teamwork skills
developing learner-centred learning and teaching approaches
building functional skills into your programme
building in effective and efficient quality-assurance systems.
The national programme of training we offer is on our website at
www.edexcel.com/training. You can request customised training through the website
or you can contact one of our advisors in the Training from Edexcel team via
Customer Services to discuss your training needs.
BTEC training and support for the lifetime of the qualifications

Training and networks: our training programme ranges from free introductory
events through sector-specific opportunities to detailed training on all aspects of
delivery, assignments and assessment. In addition, we have designed our new
network events programme to allow you to share your experiences, ideas and best
practice with other BTEC colleagues in your region. Sign up to the training you need
at: www.btec.co.uk/training
Regional support: our team of Curriculum Development Managers and Curriculum
Support Consultants, based around the country, are responsible for providing
advice and support in centres. They can help you with planning and curriculum
developments. Call 0844 576 0027 to contact the curriculum team for your centre.
Your BTEC Support team

Whether you want to talk to a sector specialist, browse online or submit your query
for an individual response, there is someone in our BTEC Support team to help you
whenever and however you need, with:
Welcome Packs for new BTEC centres: if you are delivering BTEC for the first time,
we will send you a sector-specific Welcome Pack designed to help you get started
with these qualifications
Subject Advisors: find out more about our subject advisor team immediate,
reliable support from a fellow subject expert at:
www.edexcel.com/subjectadvisors
BTEC Hotline: call the BTEC Hotline on 0844 576 0026 with your query
Ask Edexcel: submit your question online to our Ask Edexcel online service
(www.edexcel.com/ask) and we will make sure your query is handled by a
subject specialist.
40
Units
41
42
UNIT 1: THE ONLINE WORLD

Level: 1 and 2
Unit type: Core/Mandatory
Guided learning hours: 30
Assessment type: External
Unit introduction
How do websites work? How do emails reach your computer? How does the use of
computer applications affect your daily life? This unit provides an introduction to the
modern online world. Starting with your own experiences, you will extend your
knowledge of online services and investigate the technology and software that
supports them. You will learn more about a range of services including email,
online data storage, collaborative software, search engines and blogging.
This unit will help you understand the main technologies and processes behind the
internet and investigate how they come together to let you view websites and send
information across the world. The internet and web of tomorrow will be even more
powerful, more connected, more intuitive and a more important part of our lives.
This will result in an internet of services, objects and infrastructure (ubiquitous
computing) which will radically change our lives. For example, smart appliances will
be able to talk to each other, clothes will monitor our health and retailers will access
social media to gain insight into shoppers preferences.
You will explore a range of digital devices, such as smart phones and digital music
players and consider the technology that enables these devices to share and
exchange information.
This technology has created new concerns regarding security and privacy. You will
investigate these concerns and consider how users should behave online to safeguard
themselves and respect others.
This unit is essential if you are considering a career in the IT sector. Online systems
and technology have become part of everyday work, so being able to understand and
work with this technology is relevant in many roles in the industry.
This unit supports all of the optional specialist units in the Award, especially: Unit 4:
Creating Digital Animation, Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio, Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics, and Unit 7: Creating Digital Video. It also supports Unit 8: Mobile Apps
Development, Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development, Unit 10: Database Development,
Unit 11: Computer Networks and Unit 13: Website Development, as these
technologies form an important part of our online world.
Learning aims
In this unit you will:
A investigate online services and online communication
B investigate components of the internet and how digital devices exchange and
store information
C investigate issues with operating online.
43

What needs to be learnt
Learning aim A: Investigate online services and online communication
Online services
Understand how and why online services can be used.
Examples of online services, include:
communication (email, instant messaging, newsgroups, social networking,
online conferencing, blogs)
real-time information (train timetables, news services, traffic reports, flight status
updates, weather)
commerce (internet banking, online auction websites, retail sales, publishing)
government (online tax returns, e-voting, applications for services/grants,
revenue collection)
education (online learning/training)
virtual learning environments (VLEs)
business (video conferencing, collaborative working, business networks)
entertainment (multi-user games, radio players)
download services (music, film, upgrades, software).
Understand:
the features of online advertising designed to capture attention and retain interest
the affiliate model of pay-per-click direction of traffic to websites
the services provided for online data storage including data backup, file access and
file sharing.
Online documents
Understand online document systems, including:
the need to compress (.zip) files for download/upload
how files are compressed and expanded
the advantages of using online software to create documents, including collaborative
working, sharing documents and automatic backup
comparing the use of online software with standalone software for the creation
of documents
the need for version control, levels of access and file permissions, including read
only, read/write and full control when sharing documents online.
continued
44

Online communication
Understand how and why online communication can be used, including:
contemporary social media to publish and access information, including web logs
(blogs), wikis and podcasting
virtual learning environments (VLE) in education
social networking websites to share information and build online communities.
Recognise and use appropriate key terms in online communication:
netiquette
profile
network of friends
online community
virtual world
chat
chatroom.
Understand the implications of online communication:
the advantages of using social networking websites for communication
the use of instant messaging
the client and server roles required to support instant messaging
real-time communication over the internet using speech and live video, including
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and web meeting/conferencing software
Understand and compare the issues involved when communicating and working online,
including:
the concept and implications of cloud computing , including cloud storage
the concept, application of and implications of ubiquitous computing.
Understand how ubiquitous computing systems/environments are the internet of
objects. For example, when information processing has been thoroughly integrated into
everyday objects and activities, such as a fridge that monitors supplies, stock control
and location in a warehouse, office buildings that record where people are in the
building, a plant watering system or a pet collar. Everyday objects in ubiquitous
computing systems/environments usually contain RFID chips (radio frequency
identification systems).
45

Learning aim B: Investigate components of the internet and how digital
devices exchange and store information
The internet
Understand what the internet is, how it works, and how it is structured, including:
the internet as a global network of interconnected computers
roles of Points of Presence (PoP) and Network Access Points (NAP) in the
infrastructure of the internet.
internet infrastructure in terms of clients, servers, routers, networks and connecting
backbones
when it is appropriate to use different internet connection methods including
broadband, wireless and dial-up, and advantages and disadvantages of alternative
connection methods
Internet Protocols (IP), including Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and File
Transfer Protocol (FTP)
the role of an Internet Service Provider (ISP)
the main services offered by Internet Service Providers (ISPs) including email,
web space, internet access and online support
the relationship between bandwidth and transmission rates.
Worldwide web
Understand the concepts, functions and impact of the worldwide web (WWW),
including:
the worldwide web (WWW) as the collection of information on computers connected
to the internet
the role of a web server
the structure of a website in terms of hyperlinked web pages.
the components of a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) and the roles of each
component
the function of HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
that HyperText Markup Language (HTML) is used to create web pages
the main features of HyperText Markup Language (HTML) source code
the role of internet browsers in requesting and displaying web page components
the purpose of search engines and their role in maintaining indexes of web pages.
continued
46

Email
Understand the purpose, concepts, processes and implications of email, including:
email as a system for sending messages through the internet from user to user
what happens to send an email
the advantages of using email, including the ability to send attachments and to send
the same email to more than one recipient
email protocols including Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Post Office
Protocol 3 (POP3), Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
the advantages and drawbacks of using email and webmail
the store and forward email model and describe its role in sending messages from
user to user through the internet.
Data exchange
Understand the concepts, processes and implications of data exchange and compare
different methods, including:
data exchange as the passing of data between computers in a network including the
internet
transmission modes (simplex, half-duplex and duplex) used by digital devices
including smart phones, printers, computer processors, remote controllers
(e.g. for TVs)
the hardware and software required for real-time communication including Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) and web meeting/conferencing
the role of a Coder/Decoder (CODEC) in the transmission of a VoIP, audio-file and
video-file conversation
main characteristics of alternative transmission methods, including:
o fibre optic
o wireless (infrared, microwave, satellite)
o wire connectors
parallel and serial transmission of data, and bi-directional transmission
the benefits of packet switching as a method of sending data over a wide area
network
the contents of a packet as a group of bits that include packet identification,
error control bits, coded data, destination address
comparison of data transfer rates, effective ranges, and identify appropriate uses
of different transmission methods, including:
o fibre optic
o wireless (infrared, microwave, satellite)
o wire connectors.
continued
47

Understand the concepts, structures and implications of wireless networks, including:
the components of a wireless network including router, access points and wireless
network adaptors
client-side processing including the use of rollover images on a web page
server-side processing including submitting a completed form on a web page
the difference between client-side processing and server-side processing and
examples of client-side and server-side processes.
Data storage
Understand the concepts, processes and implications of data storage, including:
a database structure in terms of tables, records, fields, data types and relationships
an online database such as a database that can be accessed via a network, including
the internet
the roles of a Database Management System (DBMS) and structured query languages
in the manipulation of data stored in an online database.
48

Learning aim C: Investigate issues with operating online
Possible threats to data
Understand the concepts, applications, process and implications regarding protecting
data online, including:
malicious and accidental damage to data and situations where either could occur
security measures taken to protect data that is transmitted and stored digitally
including encryption, firewalls and anti-virus software
measures taken to protect the security and integrity of data, including passwords,
levels of permitted access, firewalls and anti-virus software
the need to backup data and identify and describe different procedures for backing
up data.
how data might be recovered if lost
the benefits and possible inherent dangers of widespread use of social networking
websites and instant messaging
the importance to individuals of the management of their e-reputation
security issues and consequences associated with the widespread use of email,
including spread of viruses, phishing and identity theft.
Consider ways in which online technology can be used to monitor individuals
movements and communications.
In relation to IT systems, consider how current legislation controls how personal data
can be used and must be protected by organisations.
49
Teacher guidance
Resources
There are no special resources needed for this unit.
Assessment guidance
This unit is assessed using an onscreen test. Edexcel sets and marks the test. The
test lasts for 1 hour and has 50 marks. The assessment is available on demand.
Learners will complete an onscreen test that has different types of questions
including objective and short-answer questions. Where appropriate, questions will
contain graphics, photos, animations or video. An onscreen calculator is available for
questions requiring calculations. An onscreen notepad is available for making notes.
Each item will have an accessibility panel that allows a learner to zoom in and out,
and apply a colour filter.
Learners should be encouraged to keep up to date with emerging technology as part
of their learning experience.
Centres are encouraged to be aware of developments in systems and technologies.
In terms of assessment, we will issue updates annually in April to be taken into
account during delivery from the following September. External assessments will
reflect updates from the subsequent January.
50
UNIT 2: TECHNOLOGY SYSTEMS

Level: 1 and 2
Unit type: Core/Mandatory
Assessment type: External
Unit introduction
Technology systems are involved in many of the objects we use every day, from
a laptop computer and routers relaying internet traffic, to logging in to a social
networking site. This unit provides a first look at how the main building blocks of
technology systems work.
You will explore the common hardware components of technology systems, such as
a touch screen or a printer, and the internal building blocks of a computer like the
processor, buses and memory. The unit also covers the purpose of networks, which
allow different devices within a technology system to communicate. (This topic is
covered in more detail in Unit 1: The Online World and Unit 11: Computer Networks.)
No technology system is complete without the software that brings it to life. You will
explore different types of software. These will include the operating system (OS) that
supports the communication and management of resources, and utility programs that
provide functionality to maintain the system.
You will also learn about the role of applications software, such as office programs,
graphics packages, accounting software and CAD/CAM, that supports many aspects
of everyday business life.
This unit supports all of the optional specialist units in the Award, especially Unit 8:
Mobile Apps Development, Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development, Unit 10: Database
Development, Unit 11: Computer Networks, Unit 12: Software Development
and Unit 13: Website Development.
This unit is particularly useful if you are considering a career in the IT sector,
as it includes key concepts and processes which form the basis of any technology
system and is relevant for many roles in the industry.
Learning aims
A understand how the components of technology systems work together
B understand how data flows between internal components of a computer and is
processed to provide information
C understand different types of software.
51

Learning aim A: Understand how the components of technology systems
work together
Computer and technology systems
Understand the concepts:
a computer is a machine that processes digital data
a technology system is the complete collection of components (hardware, software,
peripherals, power supplies, communication links) making up a single computer
installation.
Applications and issues of technology systems
Understand:
application of technology systems used in different sectors, including construction,
finance, health, manufacturing (including CAD/CAM/use of robots) and retail
issues involved in the use of technology systems, including health and safety,
security measures (passwords, authentication, levels of access), environmental,
sustainability, privacy and copyright
reasons why future development of a technology system is important to
organisations, including competitive advantage, reduced costs and improved
performance.
Computer hardware devices
Understand the features, uses and implications of hardware devices, including:
devices (PC, server, laptop, tablet, games console and other programmable digital
devices)
input keyboard, mouse, sensors, touch screen, microphone, scanner,
digital camera
output printers (inkjet, laser, impact), speakers, force feedback devices, actuators,
screens, projectors, robot arms, other control devices
storage devices solid state, optical media, magnetic media
that modern technology devices are often multifunctional (have both input and
output functionality)
how hardware components and software can be combined to form an automated
technology system (self-service checkout, production line)
the uses of devices that capture data for automated systems (barcode readers,
magnetic strip readers, optical character readers (OCR), optical mark readers (OMR)
and radio frequency identification systems (RFID))
suitable devices to suit the requirements for a specific user and purpose, and justify
their use.
continued
52

Computer networking
Understand the concepts, applications and implications of networks, including:
the purpose of different types of network (local area network (LAN), wide area
network (WAN), personal area network (PAN), mobile broadband)
the common uses of network systems (resource sharing, data sharing,
entertainment, communication)
the benefits of computer networking
the need to synchronise data held on devices forming a PAN.
Data transfer
Understand the concepts, implications and processes of data transfer, including:
physical methods of transferring data between devices using wireless or cabled
topology to meet the requirements for a specific user and purpose
wireless methods of transfer including the use of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
technologies
cabled methods for transfer of data between devices, including the use of optical
fibre, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) and coaxial cables
the benefits and drawbacks of these physical methods.
53

Learning aim B: Understand how data flows between internal components of a
computer and is processed to provide information
Internal components of a computer
Understand the main characteristics, functions and role of the internal components
of a computer, including:
the motherboard printed circuit board (PCB) holding main components of
the system
central processing unit (CPU) arithmetic and logic unit (ALU), control unit, registers
memory (RAM, ROM, including Flash memory)
graphics/sound/video hardware
heat dispersal systems fans and heat sinks
storage devices solid state, optical and magnetic
how internal components of a computer affect performance and user experience
comparison of different specifications of internal components
how the features of the central processing unit and graphical processing unit affect
performance and user experience:
o clock speed
o caches
o multiple processing cores
o heat, power consumption
how the features of mobile devices affect performance/user experience:
o System-on-a-Chip (SoC)
o CPU and GPU
o battery life
comparing how mobile systems are different from traditional platforms
how the features of memory and storage devices affect performance/
user experience:
o memory (cache and RAM)
o storage devices (solid state, optical and magnetic media)
the role of computer buses in carrying data between the internal components of
a computer.
continued
54

Analogue and digital data
Understand the concepts, processes and implications of data transmission, including:
the differences between analogue and digital transmission of data
the need to convert analogue signals to digital signals and digital signals to
analogue signals
how data in a computer is represented using binary notation (bit, bytes,
word length).
Understand and use binary format and the concepts of data storage, including:
how characters can be represented in binary format and convert whole numbers into
binary numbers (zero up to 10)
conversion of binary numbers (up to 8 bits) to whole numbers (base 10)
units used to describe memory and data storage (bit, byte, kilobyte, megabyte,
gigabyte, terabyte, petabyte).
55

Learning aim C: Understand different types of software
Software
Understand the concepts, differences and implications of software, including:
software as a series of programs used to direct the operation of
technology systems
the differences between custom-made and off-the-shelf programs
the advantages and disadvantages of using custom-made and off-the-shelf
programs.
Understand the concepts, implications and structures of programming, including:
the hierarchical structure of a computer as:
o application software package (user interface)
o high-level programming language
o low-level programming language
o machine code (binary number notation)
o hardware
the main characteristics of high-level programming languages, including imperative,
procedural, event-driven and object-orientated programming languages
the main characteristics of low-level programming languages, including assembly
language and machine code
the main distinctions between programs in high-level and low-level forms in terms
of structure, closeness to spoken language and intuition of use.
Introduction to computer programming concepts
Understand, use and interpret flowcharts, including:
flowchart symbols as described in the British Computer Societys BCS Glossary of
Computing and ICT (ISBN 978-1-906124-00-7, or subsequent editions), including
terminators, connectors, processes and decision boxes
the purpose of simple processes represented in flowchart diagrams
(decision making, finding largest/smallest number in a sequence, rates of
discount/interest/payments)
inputs and/or outputs from simple processes represented in flowchart diagrams,
including currency conversions, converting marks to grades, calculating wages
including overtime payments
completion of flowchart diagrams with any missing decision statements and
decision outcomes
Recognise and understand:
the terms used in a computer programs, specifically: declaration, input,
output, assignment, variables (local and global) and constants, sub-routines,
scope of variables
the need to annotate code to allow for maintenance
the use of data types, including character, string, integer, real and Boolean
the use of data structures, including records and simple arrays.
continued
56

Operating systems and applications
Understand the concepts, functions, and implications of operating systems, including:
the role of an operating system in terms of file management, hardware management
(drivers), resource allocation and security
the role of utility applications, including disk defragmenters, firewalls and anti-virus
software
the differences between graphical user interfaces and command-line user interfaces
the features of an operating system with a graphical user interface, including user
interface, accessibility and ease of use
the features and benefits of operating systems for mobile devices, including user
interface, accessibility and ease of use
the role of productivity applications, including office software, graphics, multimedia
and web-authoring software
the benefits of using suites of productivity applications
the factors to consider when installing or upgrading an operating system or
productivity application:
o hardware platform
o accessibility features
o compatibility with preferred applications and hardware
o cost (licence, set-up, training, maintenance)
o speed
o security features (including firewalls, malware management, setting user
permissions, user support).
57
Teacher guidance
Resources
There are no special resources needed for this unit.
Assessment guidance
This unit is assessed using an onscreen test. Edexcel sets and marks the test. The
test lasts for 1 hour and has 50 marks. The assessment is available on-demand.
Learners will complete an onscreen test that has different types of questions
including objective and short-answer questions. Where appropriate, questions will
contain graphics, photos, animations or video. An onscreen calculator is available for
questions requiring calculations. An onscreen notepad is available for making notes.
Each item will have an accessibility panel that allows a learner to zoom in and out,
and apply a colour filter.
Learners should be encouraged to keep up to date with emerging technology as part
of their learning experience.
Centres are encouraged to be aware of developments in systems and technologies.
In terms of assessment, we will issue updates annually in April to be taken into
account during delivery from the following September. External assessments will
reflect updates from the subsequent January.
58
UNIT 3: A DIGITAL PORTFOLIO

Level: 1 and 2
Unit type: Core
Assessment type: Internal
Unit introduction
This unit is your chance to show off! A digital portfolio is an exciting onscreen way to
showcase your achievements to potential employers or when applying for a course.
It is all about:
the projects you have created and developed
your use of communication and presentation skills
your capabilities and potential.
Digital portfolios can be viewed by anyone with a computer and an internet browser.
You will learn how to create a digital portfolio that includes a series of web pages
with links to content that you have created. You will learn how to make use of
multimedia assets such as images, sound and video to make your portfolio appealing
and engaging.
For this unit, your digital portfolio will have a clear purpose and audience to show
them who you are and what you are capable of. It should have a structure that is
logical and easy to navigate and must be in a format that can be uploaded and
viewed on the web.
You should think of your portfolio as a shop window, carefully selecting a range
of content including work done on this BTEC course as well as any other appropriate
content. Every item should be clearly introduced, explaining why it is included and
what it demonstrates to the viewer. Multimedia assets should be used to enhance the
experience for the viewer, not as a substitute for good content.
This unit can be used as synoptic unit to bring together the content of all the optional
specialist units in the course. It can be studied alongside the other units and
completed at the end of the course.
Learning aims
A design a digital portfolio
B create and test a digital portfolio
C review the digital portfolio.
59

Learning aim A: Design a digital portfolio
Basic project lifecycle
Stages of the project lifecycle:
design (e.g. storyboards, structure chart, assets, software)
create/develop and test a product e.g. iterative cycle of development and feedback
from test users
review (e.g. feedback from others).
Digital portfolio structure
Web pages, including:
home page with introduction and links to sections
section pages to introduce purpose of section and link to context pages
context pages to introduce and link to items of content.
Digital portfolio user interface
Interface to include:
page formatting colour scheme, fonts
assets required for web pages (e.g. images, sound, video)
navigation navigation bar, links (internal, text, graphical, buttons), consistency.
Digital portfolio content
Consider:
selection variety of extracts, snapshot of experiences and projects
file formats
compression
accessibility.
What should go in the design?
Designs to include:
audience and purpose
o description of likely attributes
o description of purpose
timeline outline schedule including key stages in the project lifecycle
content files and assets required, formats, folder structure
structure chart to show how pages are linked
storyboards of webpages illustrating panels for each page
user interface formatting, assets, navigation
alternative design ideas
presentation of content file folders, compression, accessibility.
continued
60

Learning aim B: Create and test a digital portfolio
Prepare content
For the content in a digital portfolio:
prepare (including gathering and creating assets) extracts and other content for
portfolio, i.e. to demonstrate achievements and potential
convert to acceptable file formats (to ensure format is appropriate for users)
create logical folder structure for content
ensure all content is stored within the portfolio folder structure.
Create web pages
Use appropriate web authoring tools and techniques:
colour schemes
page formatting features
o tables
o fonts
o alignment
o colour
o line spacing
o bullets
content for web pages, including
o text introductions, commentaries
o images
o sound or video
o lines and simple shapes
o internal hyperlinks (text, graphical, buttons)
o navigation bar
images/objects
o position
o crop and size
o alignment
o orientation
o text wrapping
o resolution.
continued
61

Test the portfolio
To test a digital portfolio:
check all the pages and content are within the portfolio folder structure
activate links to internal content (external links are prohibited)
test the digital portfolio for functionality and document actions taken, including:
o that all links work and open correct content
o that all web pages are error free
o the effectiveness of the home page and other pages
test the digital portfolio for usability and document any actions taken, including:
o user interface
o ease of navigation
o impact of content, bearing in mind the purpose
o clear and consistent content and style
check functionality on another computer system and browser.
Learning aim C: Review the digital portfolio
Review the content of a digital portfolio, including:
considering the extent to which the portfolio meets the needs of the audience and
the purpose
evaluating the design documentation and any changes made during development
of the portfolio
incorporating comments from end reviewers
making valid suggestions for further improvements.
62
Level 2 Pass
a list of ready-made
assets to be used,
including sources.
a structure chart
indicating navigation
routes
a storyboard of the
layout and content
of pages
assets to be used.
fully referenced
sources for the readymade assets.
a detailed structure
chart with complete
navigation routes
detailed storyboard of
the layout and content
of pages
2A.P2 Produce designs for

a digital portfolio,
including:
a timeline for the
project
Produce designs for a

digital portfolio, with
guidance, including:
1A.2
alternative solutions
2A.M1 Produce detailed designs

for a digital portfolio,
including:
Level 2 Merit
2A.P1 Describe the audience

and purpose for the
design of a digital
portfolio.
outline storyboards of
the layout and content
Identify the audience

and purpose for the
design of a digital
portfolio.
1A.1
Learning aim A: Design a digital portfolio
Level 1
Assessment criteria
meet the needs of

the audience.
fulfil the stated

purpose
63
2A.D1 Justify the final design

decisions, explaining how
the digital portfolio will:
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
Create a functional
digital portfolio,
with guidance.
Test the digital portfolio

for functionality,
with guidance
1B.4
1B.5
64
Prepare portfolio
content, with guidance.#
1B.3
2B.M4 Gather feedback from

others and use it to
improve the portfolio,
demonstrating
awareness of audience
and purpose.
commentaries to
explain the content.#
consistent navigation
2B.D2 Refine the portfolio to

improve navigation and
include commentaries
that justify the choice
of content.#
Level 2 Distinction
2B.P5 Test the portfolio for

purpose and functionality
on a different system
and browser, and take
appropriate action.
context pages.
a range of suitable
assets on the web
pages
2B.M3 Develop the portfolio

using, demonstrating
awareness of the
audience:
2B.P4 Create a functional

digital portfolio,
including:
home page and
section pages
2B.M2 Select and refine a range

of portfolio content and
save in appropriate file
formats, using a logical
folder structure and
demonstrating
awareness of the
audience.#
Level 2 Merit
2B.P3 Prepare portfolio content

and save in appropriate
file formats, using
folders, demonstrating
awareness of purpose.#
Learning aim B: Create and test a digital portfolio
Level 1
Level 2 Pass
Identify how the final

portfolio is suitable for
the intended purpose.
2C.P6 Explain how the final

portfolio is suitable for
the intended audience
and purpose.
2C.M5 Review the extent to

which the final portfolio
meets the needs of
audience and purpose,
considering feedback
from others.
Level 2 Merit
#Opportunity to assess English skills
*Opportunity to assess mathematical skills
1C.6
Learning aim C: Review the digital portfolio
Level 1
65
2C.D3 Evaluate the final digital

portfolio against the
initial designs and
justify any changes
made, making
recommendations for
further improvement.
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resources required for this unit are:
web-authoring software (local or online)
audio- and/or video-recording equipment and suitable editing software.
Learners must have work from their other BTEC First in Information and Creative
Technology units available and completed in order to compile these and other
materials into the portfolio.
Assessment guidance
This unit is assessed internally by the centre and externally verified by Edexcel.
Please read this guidance in conjunction with Section 8 Internal assessment.
This unit assesses the learners ability to create a self-contained digital portfolio to
showcase evidence of their achievements, particularly their achievements on the
BTEC I&CT course. Their digital portfolio will consist of the interface (i.e. the web
pages) and content that can be accessed using it. Their portfolio must include work
from their other completed units in the BTEC I&CT course.
Learners need to be aware of the requirements of this unit at the start of their
course and could start planning for it from then. For instance, it would be beneficial
to create a folder to store extracts from products and systems developed in their
other internally assessed units, and keep a project diary where they can record
comments that would form the basis of the portfolio commentaries. However,
this unit should be completed at the end of the course.
The variety of content included in the portfolio will partly depend on the number of
units completed on the course. But learners may wish to include evidence of other
appropriate achievements, such as other qualifications, Duke of Edinburgh Award
work, community work and/or personal qualities.
The portfolio must consist of a number of web pages in .html format linked together
in a structure designed by the learner. It must be possible to view the evidence on
another system using freely available software and readers.
Any suitable software may be used to construct the portfolio, locally or online. Web
authoring software is recommended. However, if presentation or other software is
used to develop the pages of the portfolio, learners must ensure that the files are
saved in .html format; presentations or similar digital documents are not acceptable.
Learners should have given consideration to the best way of preparing and
presenting their content. When using screenshots, for example, do they display
all the required information and can they be read easily?
Context pages should present commentaries that set the scene, introduce the
content and provide additional information about the choice of evidence.
66
Learning aim A
Please note: learners portfolios must include work from other completed
units in the BTEC I&CT course.
Learners should allocate sufficient time for designing the overall style and how
they will present the content in their digital portfolio, aiming for consistency of
presentation, good layout and colour schemes, and considering how to use layout
and colour in pages viewed onscreen. They should consider the extent to which
designs will inform the creation of the digital portfolio, making sure it is clear what
the audience will experience.
For 2A.P1: learners should describe the target audience and purpose for the design
of their portfolio.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the audience and purpose for the
design of their portfolio.
For 2A.P2: learners should produce design documents for their portfolio. Designs
should include a clear idea of the timeline for the project, storyboard mapping out
the layout and content (with a minimum of eight screens), a structure chart
indicating navigation routes, and a list of ready-made assets. Assets for the web
pages, such as text, images, audio and video, should be listed. It should be clear
where these assets will be used.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce an outline design for their digital
portfolio storyboard to illustrate the layout and content (with a minimum of four
screens), and a list of ready-made assets, which together give an indication of what
the product would be like.
For 2A.M1: learners should produce outline alternative design solutions (e.g. a
description of alternative styles and layouts), detailed storyboard (with a minimum
of eight screens) showing what each web page will be like, and details of assets and
where they will be found. A structure chart should show complete navigation and a
sources table of ready-made assets should be given. The design documentation
should be sufficiently detailed to allow someone else to visualise the completed
portfolio.
For 2A.D1: learners should justify their design choices, explaining how each asset
enhances the user experience and how their choice of navigation options makes the
product easy to use, taking account of the intended audience.
Learning aim B
Learners should prepare (including gathering and creating, where needed) a range of
appropriate content, selecting extracts that show what they have achieved and give
an indication of future potential. They should create the web pages for the portfolio,
taking care to prepare assets that enhance the user experience and draw focus to the
content.
For 2B.P3: learners should create a folder structure to store the portfolio content
files and the web pages. They should ensure that all content is fit for purpose and is
in appropriate file formats, such as .pdf, .html, .jpg and .mp3. It is essential that all
content can be viewed on different systems using freely available software. Each item
of content should be given an appropriate name.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should prepare and save the portfolio content
with guidance.
For 2B.M2: learners should refine the folder structure to ensure that it is logical and
clear. They should select suitable content from their work and prepare a range of
extracts which give a good overview of their achievements, demonstrating an
awareness of the audience.
67
For 2B.P4: learners should create their digital portfolio.

The digital portfolio should include:
a home page and section pages to introduce the learner and the purpose of
the portfolio
context pages containing appropriate assets, comments to introduce the portfolio
content and links to the portfolio content.
Web pages should include comments to introduce items of portfolio content and
should make some use of suitable multimedia assets.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have created, with guidance, a functional
digital portfolio including links to some appropriate content.
For 2B.M3: learners should develop their portfolio further, demonstrating an
awareness of audience. The context pages should include clear explanations for
the choice of content and a range of assets, such as a video introduction or audio
explanation of an item of content. Learners should not spend excessive time adding
multimedia assets and should take care only to include those that improve the
portfolio and do not detract from the content. The navigation and commentaries
should be consistent throughout the portfolio.
For 2B.P5: learners should test and take appropriate action to ensure the portfolio is
fully functional. Learners should check their portfolio can be viewed on another type
of browser and another computer system.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should test the functionality of their portfolio,
but will need guidance to do so.
For 2B.M4: learners should test their portfolio and get feedback on it. Learners
should think carefully about who they choose to be test users. Ideally, test users
need to be part of the target audience or, at least, be able to represent it. Feedback
should be gathered from others regarding the portfolio. Learners should acknowledge
when a change was suggested but ignored, and give the reason.
For 2B.D2: learners should refine their digital portfolio so that it includes detailed
commentaries that contextualise the content. The assets should enhance the user
experience and the user should be drawn to the content.
Learning aim C
Learners should objectively review the extent to which the final digital portfolio
meets the requirements. Suggestions for improvement should be valid and specific.
Feedback from others should be used to inform the review process.
For 2C.P6: learners explain two reasons why their portfolio is suitable for the
intended audience and purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners identify why their portfolio is fit for purpose, for
example, My portfolio is to be part of a job application, so I have included different
projects that use lots of different skills and ideas to show everything that I can do.
For 2C.M5: learners should consider how well their portfolio addresses the needs
of the intended audience and purpose of the portfolio. Learners should incorporate
feedback from end reviewers into their review, rather than simply recording what
was said. This will be of most value if reviewers are able to represent the target
audience (e.g. adults, prospective employers), ensuring that comments are realistic
and valid.
For 2C.D3: learners should evaluate the final portfolio against the design
documentation, explaining the rationale for any changes that were made.
They should identify further potential improvements, assisted by feedback
from end reviewers.
68
Save the extracts in appropriate file formats and

in appropriate folders.
Select content and prepare extracts.
Create a logical folder structure to store the

content.
Justify the choice of assets and the design of the

portfolio in relation to the audience and purpose.
In your portfolio, specify audience and purpose.

Include a timeline, structure chart, storyboards
and details of assets required.
Design a digital portfolio to go alongside your

application, which includes at least two products
or projects you have worked on. The content of
your portfolio should show a range of your IT
skills and experience, and be related to the
work of the IT company you are applying to.
You are applying for a job with an IT company.

As part of the application process, the company
wants to see examples of the products you have
made and the projects you have completed.
Scenario
2B.P3, 2B.M2
(1B.3)
Content of the
Portfolio
Design a Portfolio
2A.P1,2A.P2
2A.M1, 2A.D1,
(1A.1, 1A.2)
Assignment
Criteria covered
showcasing products for potential customers
as part of an application to further or higher education
showcasing work to demonstrate for employers
The context of a digital portfolio can cover a variety of areas, including:
Content in folders.
Screenshot of folder structure.
Design documentation.
Assessment evidence
The table below shows a programme of suggested assignment outlines that cover the assessment criteria. This is guidance and it is
recommended that centres either write their own assignments or adapt any assignments we provide to meet local needs and resources.
Suggested assignment outlines
69
70
2C.P6, 2C.M5,
2C.D3, (1C.6)
Make the Portfolio
2B.P4, 2B.P5,
2B.M3, 2B.M4
2B.D2, (1B.4, 1B.5)
Reviewing your
Portfolio
Test the Portfolio
Assignment
Criteria covered
Review document.
Final digital portfolio and

documentation.
Final digital portfolio.
Assessment evidence
Evaluate the digital portfolio, including the

extent to which it meets the needs of audience
and purpose. Explain any changes to the product
compared with the design, incorporate feedback
from end reviewers and make recommendations
for further improvements.
Ask test users to try out portfolio and give

feedback. Make changes if appropriate.
Check the web pages for errors and make

changes if necessary.
Carry out testing for functionality, ensuring that

all links work and open the correct content.
Build portfolio and activate links to content.
Create a home page, section pages and context

pages using appropriate text and other assets
such as audio or video.
Scenario
UNIT 4: CREATING DIGITAL ANIMATION

Level: 1 and 2
Unit type: Optional specialist
Unit introduction
How are the amazing visual effects in science fiction and fantasy films, and computer
games, made? This unit provides you with an introduction to tools/techniques and
processes that are used commercially when creating computer animation.
Animation is the creation of moving images and has a long history. Today modern
animations are usually created using a computer. It is an exciting and fast moving
area of creative technology that provides an opportunity to combine creative and
technical computing skills, and is one in which the UK excels. The creative industries
have grown considerably in recent years and provide increasing employment
opportunities. An animator can work in a number of different creative areas: creating
effects for live-action films, feature-length animations and computer games. Nonnarrative animations feature in online advertising and software interface design.
In this unit you will investigate the range of applications and features of existing
animation products or sequences, that have been created for an intended audience
and purpose. You will be able to apply your findings when creating your own
computer animation which do not require user interaction.
You will then design, create and test your own animated product, in a similar way to
how it is done in industry, and be introduced to the technology and techniques used
by the professionals. You will be given a brief which will need to be fulfilled. You will
also need to think about the creative aspect of the project as well as technical skills
to use. You will review your completed animated product having obtained feedback
from others.
In particular, this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World and the following
optional specialist units: Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio, Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics and Unit 7: Creating Digital Video. In addition, it supports the content of
Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development and Unit 13: Website Development.
Learning aims
A understand the applications and features of digital animation products
B design a digital animation product
C create, test and review a digital animation product.
71

Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital animation
products
Types of animation
Know the different types of traditional and digital based animation, including:
flick book
cel animation
stop motion
cut-out (paper-based and computer-generated images either scanned or as graphics)
rotoscoping
skeletal animation
Flash animation
computer-generated imagery (CGI).
Applications of digital animation
Applications and purpose of digital animation, including:
different existing digitally animated products (e.g. TV programmes, films, computer
games, music videos, advertisements, internet and mobile content, simulation,
product development)
the effect (e.g. evoke emotion, educate) they have on different audiences
(e.g. age, gender, interest, need).
Features of digital animation
Features of computer-animated products, e.g.:
type of animation
2-D and 3-D models
image type (bitmap/photo and vector)
frames per second
resolution
timing and length
special effects (motion blur/fade, rendering effects, morphing, camera angles)
audio (speech, music, sound effects).
72

Learning aim B: Design a digital animation product
What goes into the design?
Designs include:
intended audience (age, gender, interests), purpose and requirements (as defined
in a brief)
storyboards containing panels which outline the main assets (characters, objects,
scenes, sounds) and which include some main panels that show how the assets
combine, with timing, camera angles and flow shown
list of any ready-made assets, with their sources documented and referenced
in a sources table, e.g.:
o graphics characters and/or objects
o audio clips speech, sound effects and/or music
o video clips
alternative ideas for the design
if required, prototypes of the animated product, e.g. characters, objects, video clips,
audio clips, scenes (hand-drawn or computer-generated prototypes are acceptable
formats for designs).
73

Learning aim C: Create, test and review a digital animation product
Creating the animation
Preparing assets
Gather ready-made digital assets (characters, objects, audio clips, video footage)
from other sources (e.g. internet, media such as CD or DVD).
Hand draw or use graphic-editing software to create original assets (characters,
objects and/or backgrounds).
Import original and ready-made assets:
o graphics and/or video files, e.g. .tga, .jpg, .png, .dpx, .iff, .avi, .mov (QuickTime),
.ac (AC3D), .obj (Wavefront), .lwo (Lightwave), .motion capture, .mp4 and .mpg
o audio files, e.g. .wav, .aiff, .au, .mp3
reference ready-made assets appropriately in a sources table, considering copyright
issues.
Graphic-editing software:
o vector editing tools/techniques, e.g.:
text
line and curve (types and thickness)
shading, colour fills, gradients, patterns
layering
o photo editing tools/techniques, e.g.:
selecting and removing parts (lasso, eraser, marquee)
cropping and resizing images
shape fill with texture, solid colours, colour gradient or outline with colour
scale, rotate, reflect and distort layers.
If required for the product, record original audio and video, import assets into
animation software and use software to edit the original assets.
continued
74

Animation-editing software
2-D digital animation techniques (3-D techniques are acceptable but not required):
o cut-out (either scanned images or digitally generated graphics)
o rotoscoping
o skeletal animation
animation-editing software tools/techniques:
o edit key frames (e.g. insert, delete, copy)
o tweening
o layering
o camera movement (e.g. panning, cuttings from one shot to another, zoom, angles)
o rendering (e.g. shading, reflections, edge effects and shadows)
o transition effects (e.g. motion blur/fade, morphing)
o audio speech, sounds and/or music
o lip-sync mouth movement to audio.
Test the animation
Improving the animation:
test the animated product for functionality (e.g. sound is audible, the animation runs,
the length of the clip is appropriate)
test that the animation is fit for purpose
gather feedback from others on quality (e.g. the characters and/or objects move as
intended, timing is accurate, sound quality is high), functionality, audience
and purpose
document any improvements and update the sources table for ready-made assets
understand the reasons for exporting and compressing animation files (e.g. to ensure
format is appropriate for reviewers and/or users)
export and compress the animation product into a suitable final file type (e.g. .swf,
.mpeg, .wmv, .sb, .mpg) and size.
Review the animation
Review the finished digital animation product for:
quality of the animation product
fitness for audience and purpose
suitability against the original requirements
legal and ethical constraints, e.g. copyright, eSafety, suitable content
strengths and improvements.
75
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Identify the intended

purpose and features of
two animation products.
2A.P1 Explain the intended

two different animation
products.
76
Produce an outline
design for an animation
product, with guidance.
1B.3
The design must include

an outline storyboard.

and purpose for the
design of an animation.
1B.2
audio.#
assets
a storyboard
description of
requirements from
the brief
2B.P3 Produce designs for an

animation product of
at least 30 seconds
duration. The design
must include:
2B.P2 Describe the audience

and purpose for the
design of an animation.
Learning aim B: Design a digital animation product
1A.1
meet the needs of

the audience.#
fulfil the stated

purpose and
requirements of
the brief
2B.D2 Justify the final design

decisions, explain how
they will:
2A.D1 Discuss the strengths

and weaknesses of two
animation products.
Level 2 Distinction
2B.M2 Produce a detailed

animation product
design, including reasons
why alternative ideas
have been discarded.#
2A.M1 Review how the products

are fit for purpose and
their intended effect
on the audience.
Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital animation products
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Edit assets to create an

animation product of
at least 20 seconds,
testing the product
for functionality with
guidance.*

animation product is
suitable for the intended
purpose.
1C.5
1C.6
2C.P6 Explain how the final

animation product is
audience and purpose.

which the final animation
product meets the needs
of the intended audience
and the purpose,
from others and any
constraints.
2C.M4 Gather feedback from

others on the quality of
the product and use it to
improve the product,
demonstrating
and purpose.*
2C.P5 Edit assets to create an

animation of at least
30 seconds which
includes audio.*
Test the product for
functionality and purpose
against the original
requirements, making
any necessary
improvements to
the product.
2C.M3 Prepare assets for the

animation product
demonstrating
with all sources of assets
fully referenced.
2C.P4 Prepare assets for the

animation product,
demonstrating
awareness of purpose,
with sources of assets
listed.
Prepare assets for

the animation,
with guidance.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Create, test and review a digital animation product
Level 1
2C.D4 Evaluate the final

animation product and
the initial design and
justify any changes
made, making
recommendations for
77
2C.D3 Refine assets to create a

high-quality animation
product.*
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resources required for this unit are animation software, e.g.:
Flash
Toon Boom Studio
Anime Studio
Blender
After Effects
any other appropriate animation software
Other optional resources include:
digital drawing tablet and pen
digital scanner
digital video recorder or web cam
solid colour background (i.e. green screen)
audio software packages such as Audacity and Apple Garage Band.
Learners will need access to a suitable assignment brief that specifies the intended
audience, purpose of the animation and the user requirements.
Assessment guidance
Evidence for this unit requires learners to show that they understand the features of
animation products and the processes involved in creating them. They also need to
demonstrate practical skills when designing, creating, testing and reviewing a digital
animation product of their own to meet a given brief.
Please note that it is not appropriate for learners to use ready-made animation
scenes or templates, such as those found in PowerPoint, and a slideshow is not
sufficient. Also, for the purpose of this qualification, stop-motion and cel animation
techniques are prohibited.
To achieve all grading criteria, learners should have access to existing animation
products.
Learning aim A
Learners should investigate two different existing animation products created using
different animation techniques, e.g. rotoscoping, flick book and cut-out, and one
of these should be 3D animation. For each product they should identify technical
features of the animation and content, audience and purpose. Learners should be
encouraged to choose products themselves to investigate, such as computer games,
computer-animated film clips, digitally animated music videos and product-design
animations (e.g. for medical devices and buildings). The two animations should be
designed for different purposes.
78
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the purpose of the animation products and
identify features, including file type and size, length, quality, any details of any
special effects, e.g. motion blur/fade, rendering effects, morphing and/or camera
angles.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose of two animated
products and limited features, e.g. file type and size, length, quality, 2-D or
3-D models.
For 2A.M1: learners should review whether the animated products are fit for
purpose and their intended effect on the audience.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at one animation in more detail and discuss the
strengths and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least one strength
and one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should design a 2-D digitally animated product to meet a given brief.
Learners are not prevented from creating 3-D animations but should recognise the
significant additional challenges this would present. The design should be for an
animation product for a specific audience and purpose that is between 30 seconds
and 2 minutes long and which runs continuously without user interaction. The
animation can be abstract but must demonstrate basic motion of at least one
character.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the creation of an animated product
as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: for the design, learners should describe the purpose and intended
audience for the product (as outlined in the brief), for the design ideas for the
product.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the audience and purpose for
their animation design.
For 2B.P3: Learners should produce design ideas for an animation product,
describing any design requirements from the brief. Initial design ideas can either
be hand drawn or produced using editing software.
They should create a list of ready-made assets (graphics, audio and video) and a
storyboard showing at least six main panels for characters, objects and audio assets
and how these will be combined. Motion should also be indicated on the storyboard.
Learners can create prototypes for their ideas, e.g. key frames, but these should not
be finished products. Learners should include audio in their designs.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce an outline design for their
animation product. An outline design would contain an outline storyboard containing
at least three main panels that give an indication of what the product would be like
and what it is about. Learners would need guidance when designing their animation.
For 2B.M2: learners should extend their design documentation and increase the
level of detail in their design documents, including outline design ideas, for example
a description of alternative characters and storyline or alternative audience. Learners
should give reasons why these ideas have been discarded and so should not be fully
worked-up designs.
They should refine the chosen design idea, which must include a detailed storyboard
showing a minimum of 12 panels, an indication of motion, and descriptions of what
original and ready-made assets are included and how they are combined. Learners
should also include details of animation effects, e.g. motion blur/fade, rendering
effects, morphing and camera angles, and what edits are required to the
ready-made assets.
79
For 2B.D2: learners should explain how each asset helps meet the purpose and
original requirements in the brief. Learners should refer back to their storyboard
and explain how the design meets the needs of the intended audience.
Learners may wish to do this by annotating their design documents and describing
why (e.g. I have used a certain gesture here because ). They should also justify
why they have chosen to combine assets in this way to fulfil the brief, and why the
chosen design was selected.
Learning aim C
Learners should create, test and review an original digital animation product of
between 30 seconds and 2 minutes in length (excluding any repeated looped
sections). Although learners may deviate from their plans (as often happens with
any project) they should aim to create a final product that closely resembles their
original design. Any major changes should be noted on their design with a brief
reason for the change, e.g. I found a more appropriate character or sound effect.
The type and nature of the graphics and video assets required by learners will
depend on the animation techniques used. The following techniques are acceptable:
cut-out either scanned, hand drawn and/or ready-made images or computerdrawn graphics
rotoscoping (video footage that is edited into a graphical format)
skeletal animation (graphical characters).
For 2C.P4: learners should gather required ready-made graphic asset(s), e.g. for
background scenes and objects, and video and audio asset(s), e.g. speech, music
and sound effects. Video and audio assets can be ready-made and/or original. All
ready-made asset(s) should be listed in a sources table.
Learners should prepare original graphics for the main characters and, if required,
for objects and scenes, demonstrating awareness of purpose, e.g. if the computer
animation is about a mad professor then the character can be recognised as such
and is appropriate for the purpose of the animation. Graphic assets can be hand
drawn, created using editing software and/or, for the rotoscoping animation
technique, they can be converted from video asset(s) into graphical assets using
the animation editing software.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should gather and prepare some assets for the
animation. Some of the graphical assets will be missing (e.g. characters, objects and
scenes) or the main characters will be incomplete (e.g. characters may be missing
limbs or shading may be unfinished) and audio assets may be omitted. Learners may
need guidance to gather and prepare their assets.
For 2C.M3: learners should gather and prepare graphics that are high quality,
demonstrating awareness of the intended audience. For example, characters should
be fit for audience in the use of characterisation, texture and colour, and the
individual assets should have a common look and feel, e.g. as with the characters
in the South Park cartoon.
The sources table should be detailed enough for another person to independently
obtain all of the assets used.
For 2C.P5: learners should edit their original and ready-made graphics and audio
assets to create their designed animation product. The animation must be at least
30 seconds long and not more than 2 minutes in length (excluding any repeated
loop sections).
80
Learners should test their products for functionality, e.g. that the animation plays
and volume levels are appropriate. The products should contain the correct assets,
and the product should be fit for purpose. For this criterion, it is acceptable to have
some brief interruptions in the motion and movement that is shaky and/or in the
wrong direction. Learners should make any improvements based on their testing.
Changes can be evidenced by annotating their design documents.
Learners should check whether their animation needs to be compressed and exported
so that teachers can review their product quickly.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should edit the original and ready-made graphics
to create an animation product of least 20 seconds (excluding any repeated looped
sections). This product may not contain any audio assets and some of the assets will
be missing or incomplete. The learner may need guidance to edit their animation
product. Learners should test their product for functionality (e.g. that the animation
plays and the volume levels are appropriate) with guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners should gather feedback from at least one other person on the
quality of their products. They should then respond to the feedback to improve the
animation, demonstrating awareness of audience and purpose. For instance, the
assets must integrate well together, with characters, objects and scenes sharing a
similar style and colour scheme.
If rotoscoping is used then an attempt must have been made to reduce boil (caused
when the output slightly deviates from the image that varies between frames, which
causes unnatural shake). This does not apply when boil is being used as a required
effect or style, which should be clearly stated in the design.
For 2C.D3: teachers should be aware that the process of creating a product is
iterative.
The digital animation product should be refined to a high quality, which means the
sound is free from noise, the motion is synchronised, smooth, realistic and flows as
intended, and the timing is accurate. All of the ideas from testing, feedback and
reviewing their designs as they create the animations should have been considered
as how best to refine the product.
Learners should ensure there are copies of both the initial and refined versions of the
animation product saved, with annotations on design documents where appropriate.
For 2C.P6: The learner should explain reasons why the product is suitable for
audience and purpose. Learners should give at least one reason for audience and
one for purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify why their animation is fit for
purpose, for example, My animation is suitable for use in a toddlers TV show,
as it is simple and easy to follow and brightly coloured.
For 2C.M5: learners should build on the strengths, weaknesses and explanations
in the Pass criteria to review how much the product is suitable for the intended
audience and purpose as defined in the designs. They should also seek feedback
from at least one other person. This could be asking a peer to watch and listen to
the computer animation and give written/recorded feedback, or playing it to the class
and asking them to fill in a short questionnaire. Learners should use this feedback
when considering how suitable their product is.
Learners must consider any legal and ethical constraints they encountered during the
creation of the animation products, for instance copyright, eSafety and the use of
content appropriate for the target audience.
81
For 2C.D4: learners should evaluate the final products against the initial designs in
terms of audience, purpose and client requirements as required by the brief, and
justify any changes that were made, explaining the rationale for those changes. They
should also recommend at least three improvements but do not need to implement
the enhancements.
82
Investigation
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
What are the strengths and the weaknesses of

each animation?
Consider at least two existing and different

animation products and explain the use of
animation features and the purpose of each.
Look at how these features are suitable for the
target audience and analyse the impact of the
clip on the audience.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
an advertisement for chocolate milkshake.
a short childrens cartoon
animations for a music video
Possible scenarios for this unit are:
Research report or a magazine

article.
Assessment evidence
83
Making the
Animation
2C.P4, 2C.M3
(1C.4), 2C.P5
2C.M4, 2C.D3
(1C.5)
84
A charity has commissioned you to produce a

short 2-D (or 3-D, for an additional challenge)
computer animation about the dangers of
smoking. The animation is for the charitys
website and is aimed at young people
1419 years old.
Smoking vs Healthdesign
2B.P2, 2B.P3
2B.M2, 2B.D2
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Records of feedback and comments.
Annotated and updated design

documents
Completed digital animation product
Design documentation and

prototypes.
Assessment evidence
Get feedback from others on the clip and refine

it to make it as high quality as you can,
recording the sources of your assets and
updating your design documents with each
change you make.
Edit your assets together and test that your

clip works.
Prepare by gathering assets together and create

your animation, keeping the audience and
purpose of your clip in mind. Note any changes
you make to your design as you go through.
Justify why your design meets the original

requirements and why you have chosen some
ideas above others.
Outline some alternative ideas for the animation,

such as characters, plot or effects.
a list of assets to use, including some audio.
a storyboard
Design an animation for the charity, including:
Describe who are the audience for your

animation, and what its purpose is. What are
you going to design?
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Review
2C.P6, 2C.M5
2C.D4, (1C.6)
Evaluate the clip, justifying why it meets the

brief, and suggest improvements and consider
any constraints. Why is it suitable for the
audience and purpose? Get feedback from
others on your animation and use it in your
explanation. Justify and explain any changes
you made to the design through the process.
How would you improve it further?
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Feedback from others.
Evaluation report.
Assessment evidence
85
86
UNIT 5: CREATING DIGITAL AUDIO

Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Audio products can be used to change an individuals mood, from the extremes of
reducing them to tears to making them smile. Many companies now routinely use
digital audio products, such as adverts on the TV, music, computer games, mobile
phones and audible alerts or warnings. Mobile devices allow us to listen to audio at
any time, so we can listen to a podcast on our MP3 player whenever and wherever
we want. Job roles which use the creation of audio include sound designers, sound
engineers and music artists and producers.
You will plan, record and edit digital audio products in a similar way to how it
is done in industry and be introduced to the technology and techniques used by
professionals. You will be given a brief that will need to be fulfilled. You will also need
to think about creative aspects of the project as well as technical skills. You will need
to record original audio and combine this with imported audio files to create an audio
product. Once finished, you will review the products, having obtained feedback from
others, and evaluate possible improvements.
optional specialist units: Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation, Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics and Unit 7: Creating Digital Video. In addition, it supports the content of
Learning aims
A understand the applications and features of digital audio products
B design digital audio products
C create, test and review digital audio products.
87

Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital
audio products
Applications of digital audio
Applications and purpose including:
a range of different existing audio products or clips (e.g. podcasts, radio adverts,
news, plays, comedy shows, live music, speeches)
the effect (e.g. evoke emotion, educate) they have on different audiences
(e.g. age, gender, interest, need).
Features of digital audio products
Features, e.g.:
file types (e.g. .mp4, .wav, .wma, .aac)
file sizes
timing and length
quality
codecs
platforms and compatibility
special effects (e.g. echo, fade, distortion, change of pitch or tempo)
voiceovers
soundtracks
layering
transitions/mixing
multi tracks.
88

Learning aim B: Design digital audio products
Designing a digital audio product
Designs include:
intended audience, purpose and any other requirements (as given in a brief)
script (e.g. what will be included in the product, any dialogue, instructions, effects
and directions)
list of any ready-made digital assets (e.g. an individual digital audio recording of any
type such as speech, music or sound effect). Sources for ready-made assets must be
documented and referenced
timeline, e.g. outlining what different assets are included and when different assets
will be combined
if required, prototype design ideas of the digital audio assets (e.g. voice overs,
soundtrack, cropping/mixing of recorded clips) and special effects (e.g. echo, fade,
distortion, change of pitch or tempo)
recording schedule (e.g. the day(s) on which learners plan to record, the equipment
they will need and the people who will be involved)
consideration of health and safety constraints while recording (e.g. trailing cables,
carrying heavy equipment, high volume levels, use of headphones) and the
environment where the recording will take place (e.g. no liquids near electrical
equipment).
89

Learning aim C: Create, test and review digital audio products
Record original audio assets
Use audio equipment:
features of recording equipment (e.g. directional, covers/pop shields/muffs,
range (Hz), length of cord/wireless, portability/clip-on, cost)
types of equipment used for recording:
o microphones
o other equipment (e.g. dictaphones, in-camera, mobile phones)
features of playback equipment (e.g. range (Hz), length of cord/wireless, cost)
types of equipment for playback:
o headphones
o speakers.
Prepare and test the equipment
Use audio equipment:
perform a soundcheck and adjust set up if necessary (e.g. to reduce background
noise), distance from microphone and sound levels
record original audio assets safely from different sources.
Create digital audio products
Prepare (gather and create) audio assets.
Gather ready-made audio assets from other sources (e.g. the internet, other media
such as CD or DVD) and reference them in a sources table
Audio editing software, e.g.
import audio files (e.g. .wav, .aiff, .au, and .mp3)
editing, e.g.:
o cut, copy, paste and delete clips
o edit and mix tracks
o fade the volume up or down smoothly
o layering separate audio assets
effects, e.g.:
o change the pitch without changing the tempo, or vice versa
o adjust volumes, balance, amplify, and normalise effects
o special effects like echo and reverse speech
o filters (e.g. pitch, tempo, pan)
sound quality, e.g.:
o clean the audio product of unwanted noise (e.g. static, hiss or hum)
o understand tracks can have different sample rates or levels of quality
(e.g. 24 bit or 32 bit).
continued
90

Test audio products
Test and refine audio products
Test the audio products for functionality (e.g. checking that the assets work, that
sound is audible, the clip runs, the length of the clip is correct) and against the
original requirements of the brief
Gather feedback from others on feedback on quality (e.g. they are free of unwanted
noise, the assets are synchronised and flow, timing is accurate and sound quality is
high), functionality, audience and purpose.
Document any improvements, including updating the sources table for ready-made
assets.
Understand the reasons for exporting and compressing audio files (e.g. to ensure
format is appropriate for reviewers or users).
Export and compress the audio product into suitable final file type (e.g. .mp3, .wav,
.wma) and size.
Review the audio products
Review the finished audio products for:
quality of the audio product
meeting the original requirements
legal and ethical constraints (e.g. copyright, eSafety, suitable content)
91
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
92
1A.1

purpose and features
of two digital audio
products.

purpose and features
of two different digital
audio products.

and weaknesses of the
digital audio products.
Level 2 Distinction

their intended effect on
the audience.
Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital audio products
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Produce outline design(s)

for the digital audio
product(s).
1B.3
a timeline.#
a list of the readymade digital audio

assets to be used
a script
description of
requirements from
the brief
2B.P3 Produce designs for two

digital audio products,
each of at least three
minutes duration, which
together include speech,
music and sound effects.
Each design must
include:

and purpose for the
design of a digital
audio product.
2B.M2 Produce detailed audio

designs, including
reasons why alternative
ideas have been
discarded.#
Level 2 Merit
timeline.
outline script
Each design must

include:

and purpose for the
design of a digital
audio product.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design digital audio products
Level 1
93
meet the needs of the

intended audience.#
fulfil the stated

purpose and
requirements of
the brief

they will:
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
Edit audio assets to

create a digital audio
product of at least three
minutes duration, and
test it for functionality,
with guidance
For each of the final

identify how they are
purpose.
1C.5
1C.6
94
2C.D4 Evaluate the final digital

audio products against
the initial designs and
justify any changes
made, making
recommendations for
further improvements.
2C.D3 Refine audio assets to

create two high-quality
digital audio products.
Level 2 Distinction

which each of the final
digital audio products
meets the needs of the
intended audience and
the purpose, considering
feedback from others
and any constraints.
2C.P6 For each of the final

explain how the final
product is suitable for
and purpose.
Test the products for

functionality, purpose
and against the original
any necessary
improvements to
the products.

the digital audio products
and use it to improve the
product, demonstrating
and purpose.
2C.M3 Record high quality

original audio,
demonstrating
awareness of audience,
fully referenced.
Level 2 Merit
2C.P5 Edit audio assets to

create two digital audio
products each of at least
three minutes duration.
2C.P4 Carry out a soundcheck

and record audio,
demonstrating
and prepare audio
assets, listing sources
used.
Record audio and gather

audio assets, with
guidance.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Create, test and review digital audio products
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
suitable audio editing software package, e.g. Audacity, Adobe Audition, Apple
Garage Band, Sony Sound Forge
microphones and/or other recording equipment
headphones/speakers.
Learners need access to assignment briefs that specify the intended audience and
purpose for the audio products required.
Assessment guidance
Evidence for this unit will require learners to show that they understand the features
of audio and the processes involved in recording and editing it. They also need to
demonstrate practical skills in designing, creating, testing and reviewing an audio
product of their own to meet a given brief.
To achieve all grading criteria, learners should have access to existing audio
clips/products for investigation. They should also have access to equipment and
software to allow them to create their own audio product through editing and testing
audio assets.
Learners should record their own original audio assets to combine and edit into the
final product. A final product should not only contain ready-made audio files edited
together but must also include some original material.
Learning aim A
Learners should investigate two different existing audio products and identify
features about the technical qualities, the content, intended audience and purpose.
Learners should be encouraged to choose their own products or clips and to
investigate different types of products, such as podcasts, radio adverts, music,
and recordings of speeches. The two digital audio products should be designed for
different purposes.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the purpose of the audio products or clips and
the features used including file type and size, length, quality, details of any special
effects, e.g. voiceovers, layering, mixing or use of multitracks.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose of two audio
products/clips and limited features file type and size, length and quality.
For 2A.M1: learners should review whether the audio products/clips are fit for
purpose and how they are intended to affect the audience.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the digital audio products in more detail and
discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least
one strength and one weakness.
95
Learning aim B
Learners should design two audio products to given briefs. Each product should
be between three and five minutes long and for a specific audience and purpose.
Between the two products, they should have the opportunity to combine speech,
music and sound effects. Learners should consider any health and safety
requirements, e.g. trailing cables, carrying heavy equipment, high volume levels,
use of headphones, and the environment where the recording will take place, e.g.
possibly near a busy road.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the creation of audio products as part
of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A digital portfolio).
For 2B.P2: for each design, learners should describe the purpose and target
audience, relating this to their design ideas for the product.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the audience and the purpose for
their design.
For 2B.P3: learners will generate design ideas for a digital audio product. Learners
should include any requirements for the product required in the brief. They should
create a list of ready-made assets to be combined, a script and a timeline showing
how and when the different assets will be combined. The script should include the
people involved and give an overview of what will be included, and any dialogue.
Learners could also include a recording schedule to help organise their recordings.
Learners can create prototypes for their ideas, e.g. a sound effect, but these should
not be finished products.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce an outline design for their audio
products. An outline design would contain an outline script and a timeline to give an
indication of what the product would be like and what it is about.
For 2B.M2: learners should extend their design documentation and increase the
detail in their design documents, including outlines of alternative ideas and give the
reasons why they have discarded them, e.g. an outline of variations on the script or
alternative audiences for their products. These should not be fully worked up designs,
but annotations or sketches to demonstrate the development in their design process.
Learners should refine both designs, which must include a detailed script (including
timing), any instructions or stage directions, note where assets are included, and
include a detailed timeline for how the different assets will be combined. The detailed
timeline should include details on what sort of transitions, fades, etc. are required.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify why they chose the final design ideas from the
alternative ideas outlined for the Merit criteria. Learners should explain how each
asset helps meet the purpose and requirements from the brief. Learners should refer
back to their script and timeline for combining assets, and explain how the design
meets the needs of the intended audience and purpose.
why, e.g. I have used sound fading in here because . They should also justify why
they have chosen to combine assets in this way to fulfil the brief, and why the chosen
design was selected.
96
Learning aim C
Learners should prepare and carry out recordings and gather and source additional
ready-made assets such as music and sound effects. They should then use these
to create their planned audio products.
Although learners may deviate from their plans (as happens with any project), they
should aim to create final products that closely resemble their original design. Any
major changes should be noted on their design with a brief reason for the change,
e.g. Had to change an actors voice due to illness or Found a different, more
appropriate piece of music.
For 2C.P4: learners should check their equipment (as defined in their design) and
carry out a soundcheck to make sure they are prepared for their actual recordings,
making adjustments if necessary, e.g. ensuring minimal or no background noise
and good sound levels. These could be evidenced by photographs and/or witness
statements.
Learners should then carry out their recordings. If they need to carry out several
recordings in different locations then they should complete a new soundcheck
each time.
Learners should gather and prepare ready-made audio assets such as music and/or
sound effects. To evidence gathering these audio assets, learners should include a
table of sources. Learners should demonstrate an awareness of purpose for the
product.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should create original recordings and gather
prepared ready-made audio assets. They may not have carried out a soundcheck
and their recordings may be of low quality. Learners may need guidance to prepare
their assets.
For 2C.M3: learners should ensure that their recordings are high quality, meaning
that the recordings are clear with minimal background noise. The table of sources
should be detailed enough for another person to independently obtain all of the
assets used. Learners should demonstrate an awareness of the intended audience.
For 2C.P5: learners should edit their original recordings and gathered assets to
create their designed audio products, while considering the requirements of the brief.
Their two products must each be at least three minutes in length but no more than
five minutes in length.
Learners should test their products for purpose and functionality, checking that the
products play and that volume levels are appropriate, and that they are the correct
length and contain the correct assets, and then make improvements based on that
testing.
If required, when learners have completed their audio products, the products should
be compressed and available in a suitable file type to enable review and feedback to
take place.
For level 1 as a minimum, learners should edit the original and gathered audio, and
created audio product(s) of least three minutes. Learners may need guidance to
create their digital audio product. Learners should test their product for functionality,
with guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners should gather feedback from at least one other person on the
quality of their products. They should then respond to the feedback to improve the
audio, demonstrating awareness of audience and purpose in the changes they make.
iterative.
97
The product should be refined to a high quality, which means the sound is free from
noise, the assets are well synchronised and flow, and the timing is accurate. The
product should be refined, using feedback from others where appropriate. Learners
should ensure there are copies of both the initial and the refined versions of the
audio products saved, with annotations on design documents where appropriate. All
of the ideas from testing, feedback and reviewing their designs as they create the
digital audio products should have been considered as how best to refine the product.
For 2C.P6: learners should explain reasons why the product is suitable for audience
and purpose. Learners should give at least one reason for audience and one for
purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their products are fit for
purpose, for example, My audio clip is for news radio programme, so it is short and
keeps to the facts, with one person speaking and music only at the beginning and
end
from the Pass criteria to review how much the product is suitable for the intended
audience and purpose as defined in the designs. They should also seek feedback from
at least one other person. This could be by asking a peer to listen to their clip and
give written/recorded feedback, or by playing it to the class and asking them to fill
in a short questionnaire. Learners should use this feedback when considering how
suitable their product is.
Learners must consider and explain any legal and ethical constraints they
encountered during the creation of the audio products. For instance, copyright,
eSafety, and the use of appropriate content for the target audience.
terms of audience, purpose and original requirements in the brief, and justify any
changes that were made, explaining the rationale for those changes. They should
also recommend at least three improvements but do not need to implement them.
98
Research
2A.P1, 2A.M1
Match these features to the target audience,

analyse the impact of the clip on the audience.
Review at least two existing and different

audio products and explain features about
the technical qualities, content and message/
purpose.
In order to design your two audio products,

you first must do some research into trails
and podcasts that are currently available.
You are applying for a job with BBC Radio 4. As

part of your application process, you have been
asked to produce a trail for a new radio comedy
programme and a short podcast to inform
listeners about a recent scientific discovery.
Scenario
2A.D1, (1A.1)
Assignment
Criteria covered
a live music recording.
a trail for a radio drama
a radio advert
a comedy sketch for radio
a radio news segment
a short podcast (humorous or informative)
Possible scenarios for this unit include:
99
Research report or magazine articles.
Assessment evidence
Production and
Post-production
Editing and testing
2C.P4, 2C.M3
(1C.4)
2C.P5, 2C.M4
2C.D3, (1.C5)
100
Using your experience from your research,

you now can plan your trail and your podcast.
Pre-production
2B.P2, 2B.P3
2B.M2, 2B.D2
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Evidence of testing and feedback,

e.g. completed questionnaire or
witness statement.
Edit the original footage into audio clips,

incorporating all the different gathered assets.
Make sure your products are as high quality as
you can make them.
Test the products for functionality, check they

are in a suitable format for review and gather
feedback from another person.
Completed audio clips in native or

compressed file type.
Digital files of ready-made sound

assets.
Digital files of original audio

recordings.
Evidence of soundcheck, e.g.

completed checklist with photographs
or video of learner carrying it out.
Design documents or prototypes

including description of purpose
and audience, script, list of assets,
and timeline of how the assets
will combine.
Assessment evidence
Each of your products now needs to be edited

and tested before being completed.
Carry out a sound check and prepare to record,

including checking sound levels. Record all
original audio footage. Gather additional audio
assets and create a bibliography for the sources
of assets.
For each product, you have to prepare and carry

out your recordings.
Justify how this design entirely meets the

briefs. How are they suited for the audience
and purpose?
Create a script and list of assets and plan for

how the different assets will combine.
Design two audio products based on the briefs.

Describe the purpose and target audience
for each. What are the requirements in the
brief for these clips?
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Review
2C.P6, 2C.M5,
2C.D4, (1.C5)
At the interview, you will be expected to

evaluate your products and discuss how you
could improve them. Evaluate the final product,
justifying how they meet the briefs and are
suitable for the audience and the purpose.
Suggest improvements and consider any
constraints.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Evaluation report.
Assessment evidence
101
102
UNIT 6: CREATING DIGITAL GRAPHICS

Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
You will see graphics at work whenever you surf websites, play computer games,
go shopping or read a user manual. Graphics are used to communicate messages
in every part of our lives, such as advertising, music, fashion, interior design and
architecture. It is the job role of a graphic designer to create digital graphics, that
bring colour, information and interest to our lives for a wide range of industries.
In this unit you will investigate a range of applications and features of existing graphic
products and consider their audience and purpose. You will be able to apply some of what
you discover to your own digital graphic products.
You will design, create and test graphic products in a similar way to how it is done in
industry and be introduced to the technology and techniques used by professionals.
You will need to think about the creative aspects of the product as well as the technical
(both vector-editing and photo-editing). Once finished, you will review the products,
having obtained feedback from others, and evaluate possible improvements.
optional specialist units: Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation and Unit 7: Creating
Digital Video. In addition, it supports the content of Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development
and Unit 13: Website Development.
Learning aims
A understand the applications and features of digital graphic products
B design digital graphic products
C create, test and review digital graphic products.
103

Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital
graphic products
Applications of digital graphics
Applications and purpose, including:
a range of different existing graphic products (e.g. logos, signs, posters, magazine
covers, packaging, web graphics, engineering drawings, manuals, imagery in movies
and computer games)
the effect (e.g. to invoke emotion, educate, inform, entertain) they have on different
audiences (e.g. age, gender, interest, need).
Features of digital graphics
Features, e.g.:
type vector graphic or bitmap image (photograph)
text
composition
use of colour and texture
size and position
characters and objects
file type and sizes
resolution.
104

Learning aim B: Design digital graphic products
Design documents
Designs include:
intended audience, purpose and requirements as defined in a brief for
two products, one vector with text and one bitmap with text
initial design ideas/prototypes (an early sample or model built to test a concept)
to illustrate content and appearance and can either be produced using:
o digital editing techniques (as given in learning aim C), or
o traditional methods such as hand-drawn on paper
a list of ready-made bitmap and/or vector digital graphic assets (e.g. a company
logo, a character or an object) which can be combined with original graphic assets
to create a product sources for ready-made assets must be documented and
referenced
consideration of health and safety constraints while taking original photographs
with a camera (e.g. carrying heavy equipment and the environment where the
photography will take place, e.g. no liquids near electrical equipment).
105

Learning aim C: Create, test and review digital graphic products
Preparing assets
Gathering and selecting ready-made vector and bitmap assets, considering:
sources (e.g. the internet, other media such as CD or DVD), referencing
them appropriately
copyright for ready-made graphics.
Graphics software
Vector editing software tools/techniques, e.g.:
line (types and thickness)
shapes
text
shading and effects
colour fills, gradients and patterns
group and ungroup
rotate and reflect
scale and dimensions
duplicate and clone
combine shapes and paths
edit and break apart paths
layering.
Photo editing software tools/techniques, e.g.:
importing and combining images
selecting and removing parts (lasso, eraser and marquee)
cropping and resizing images
duplicate and clone
colour selection and palettes
gradients and opacity
brush and spray effects
contrast and greyscale
filters
scale, rotate, reflect and distort layers.
continued
106

Testing and refining graphic products
Use different processes to test and refine graphic products:
vector and bitmap asset properties (e.g. resolution, file type, filesize, compression)
gather feedback from other people on quality (e.g. resolution, accuracy of the line
drawing), audience and purpose
document any improvements to the products, including updating the sources table
for ready-made assets
understand the reasons for exporting and compressing graphic product files
(e.g. to ensure format is appropriate for reviewers or users)
export and compress the graphic products into suitable final file types
(e.g. .jpg, .gif, .swf)
Reviewing products
Review the finished graphic products for:
quality
legal and ethical constraints (e.g. copyright, eSafety, suitable content)
107
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
108
1A.1

two different graphic
products.

at least two different
graphic products.

graphic products.
Level 2 Distinction

their intended effect
on the audience.
Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital graphic products
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Produce outline design(s)

for the digital graphic
products.
1B.3
a list of any readymade assets to be

used.#
documented product
ideas and/or
prototypes
requirements of
the brief
Each design must

include:
One design must be for a

vector image and the
other must be for a
bitmap image.
2B.P3 Produce designs for two

digital graphic products
with different purposes
and audiences.

and purpose for the
design of a graphic
product.
2B.M2 Produce detailed graphic

product designs,
including reasons why
alternative ideas have
been discarded.#
Level 2 Merit
Each design must include

outline product ideas.

and purpose for the
design of a graphic
product.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design digital graphic products
Level 1
meet the needs of

the audience.#
fulfil the stated

purpose and
requirements in
the brief

decisions, explaining
how they will:
Level 2 Distinction
109
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Edit assets to create

graphic products,
and test them for
functionality, with
guidance.*
For each of the final

graphic products,
identify how the final
1C.5
1C.6
110
2C.D4 Evaluate the initial

designs and the final
graphic products and
justify any changes
made, making
recommendations for
2C.D3 Refine assets to create

two high-quality digital
graphic products.*
Level 2 Distinction

which each of the final
graphic products meets
the needs of audience
and the purpose,
from others and any
constraints.
2C.P6 For each of the final

graphic products, explain
how the final product is
Test the products for

quality, purpose and
any necessary
improvements.*
2C.M4 Gather feedback on the

quality of the products,
and use it to improve the
product, demonstrating
and purpose.*
2C.M3 Prepare high-quality

assets for the graphic
products, demonstrating
fully referenced.
2C.P5 Edit assets to create two

graphic products that
both include text.
2C.P4 Prepare assets for

the graphic products,
demonstrating
with a list of sources for
ready-made assets.
Prepare assets for the

graphic products, with
guidance.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Create, test and review digital graphic products
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
vector-graphics editing software (e.g. Illustrator, CorelDRAW, DrawPlus, Inkscape,
Visio or any other suitable graphics-editing package)
bitmap-graphics editing software (e.g. PhotoShop, PaintShop Pro, PhotoPlus or any
other suitable graphics editing package)
digital devices to capture images (e.g. scanner, webcam, digital camera,
mobile phone).
Learners should have access to assignment briefs that specify the intended audience
and purpose for the two graphic products required.
Assessment guidance
Evidence for this unit will require learners to show that they understand the features
of graphic products and the processes involved in creating them. They also need to
demonstrate practical skills when designing, creating, testing and reviewing graphic
products of their own to meet the briefs. To achieve all grading criteria, learners
should have access to existing graphic products for investigation.
Learners should prepare (gather, create) assets and edit them into the final products.
The products must contain both ready-made and original vector and bitmap graphics
that have been edited and both should also include text.
Learning aim A
For 2A.P1: learners are required to review two graphic products created by others.
Learners should explain features of the products, the technical qualities, the content,
audience and purpose. Features should include composition, use of colour, size and
position. The two graphic products should be designed for different purposes.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose of two graphics
products and limited features file type and size, length and quality.
For 2A.M1: learners should review whether the graphics products are fit for purpose
and their intended effect upon the audience.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the graphic products in more detail and discuss
the strengths and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least one
strength and one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should design two graphics products to meet the given briefs. Each product
should have specific audiences and purposes and incorporate text. Between the two
products, learners should have the opportunity to consider the features of their
products, such as the use of colour, composition, textures and background images.
One product should require the use of vector graphics and the other should require
the use of bitmap images.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the creation of digital graphics
products as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
111
For 2B.P2: for each design, learners should describe the purpose and intended
audience for the product, relating this to design ideas.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the intended audience and
purpose for their designs.
For 2B.P3: learners should generate design ideas for two graphic products. The
designs must include text and must be for a minimum of one vector graphic product
and one bitmap graphic product. Learners should include a list of ready-made assets
to be used. Learners should describe the requirements for the product as outlined in
the brief, for example the dimensions of a static advert.
The design documentation should illustrate the content and appearance of the two
product ideas. The ideas can either be created using traditional hand-drawn methods
or using a range of techniques from an appropriate editing software package. They
must not be finished products but should demonstrate accuracy, e.g. where vector
lines join or where backgrounds are removed from images. The products must
incorporate text and be fit for their intended audience and purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should create an outline design for their digital
graphic products or complete a full design for one product only. An outline design
would contain the purpose and outline design documentation to give an indication
of what the product would be like and what it is about.
For 2B.M2: learners should extend their design documentation to include outline
alternative ideas, e.g. the same product photographed from different angles under
different lighting conditions, and give the reasons why they have been discarded.
These should not be fully worked-up designs but annotations or sketches to
demonstrate the design ideas.
Learners should refine detailed designs for each graphic product (e.g. specify colours,
font types, textures, photo images and characters) and as well as preparing designs
accurately with a good sense of scale.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify why they chose the final design ideas and not
their alternative designs. Learners should explain how each asset helps meet the
purpose and requirements in the brief.
Learners should refer back to their design documentation and explain how the design
meets the needs of the intended audience. They may wish to do this by annotating
their design documents and describing why (e.g. I have used a texture here because
). They should also justify why they have chosen to fulfil the brief by combining
graphics assets and text in this way, and why the chosen design was selected.
Learning aim C
The designs will be used to create the digital graphic products. Although learners
may deviate from their designs (as happens with any project), they should aim to
create final products that closely resemble their original design. Teachers should
recognise that the design process (the activities of gathering, creating and preparing
assets and then editing them to create finished products) is iterative.
For 2C.P4: learners should prepare (gather and create) their assets. They should
gather ready-made graphic assets such as photographs, logos and objects and list
them in a table of sources. Learners should also create any original assets, e.g. take
appropriate photographs using a camera and/or produce line (vector images)
drawings using editing software. Original and ready-made assets should be prepared
properly for inclusion in the digital products, e.g. cropped appropriately and created
accurately (for example where vector lines join or where backgrounds are removed
from images).
112
Both ready-made and original assets should demonstrate awareness of purpose for
the product. These could be evidenced by the individual digital assets and through
annotation on design documents.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should gather and prepare ready-made images
and create and prepare original graphic assets. The quality of their assets is likely to
be of low quality, e.g. images not cropped appropriately, vector lines that do not join
appropriately and inaccurate removal of images from backgrounds, and/or individual
assets required for their design may be missing. Learners will need guidance to
gather and prepare their assets.
For 2C.M3: learners should prepare assets, including gathering ready-made graphic
assets such as bitmap images, e.g. logos and objects, and list them in a sources
table. The table should be detailed enough for another person to independently
obtain all the assets used. Learners should keep the purpose and requirements
of the brief in mind.
Learners should create original and prepare ready-made high-quality graphic assets.
For instance, vector drawings should be to scale and proportion and be an accurate
representation of the object or character they portray. Bitmap images should be
optimised, e.g. be an appropriate file type and size and suitable resolution (for
example, images are no more than 72 dots per inch or 40-80 KB to facilitate fast
loading for a website). They should demonstrate awareness of the intended audience.
For 2C.P5: learners should edit their ready-made and original graphic assets
to create their digital graphic products, keeping the requirements of the brief in
mind. Both products should include text; one product should require the use vector
graphics and the other should require the use of bitmap images.
Learners should test the quality of their products, e.g. that images are cropped
and vector lines join appropriately, any images have been removed accurately
from backgrounds and all the required elements of the design have been included.
Learners should also check that their products are fit for purpose and make
improvements based on that testing.
If required, when learners have completed their graphic product they should
compress the file into a suitable file type to enable it to be reviewed and feedback
given.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should edit the ready-made and original graphic
assets to create at least one digital graphic product. However, the quality of their
product is likely to be low, e.g. images not cropped appropriately, vector lines that do
not join appropriately and inaccurate removal of images from backgrounds, and/or
individual assets required in their design may be missing. Learners will need
guidance to edit their digital graphic product. Learners should test their product
for functionality, with guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners should gather feedback on the quality of their products from
at least one other person, e.g. appropriate images have been used, vector drawings
are to scale and proportion, assets are an accurate representation of the object or
character they portray and a range of editing techniques have been used. They
should then respond to the feedback to improve their product, demonstrating
awareness of audience and purpose.
iterative.
113
The product should be refined to a high quality, e.g. a good selection of appropriate
and compelling imagery, correct and appropriate use of formatting and editing
techniques and a clear message. The products should have been refined using
feedback from others, where appropriate. Learners can incorporate any other
refinements into their design, noting any changes.
Learners should ensure that they have saved copies of both the initial and the refined
versions of the graphics, with annotations on design documents where appropriate.
All of the ideas from testing, feedback and reviewing their designs as they create the
digital graphic products should have been considered.
and purpose. Learners should give at least one reason for the audience and one for
the purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify why their final product is suitable
for audience and purpose. For example, This is a warning notice, so I have made
sure the words are simple and clear, and the graphics are simple to understand. I
have only used a few colours so it is easy to read quickly.
from the Pass criteria to review how much the product is suitable for the intended
at least one other person. This could be by asking a peer to review their graphics and
give written/recorded feedback, or by presenting them to the class and asking them
to fill in a short questionnaire. Learners should use this feedback when considering
how suitable their product is.
Learners must consider and explain any legal and ethical constraints they
encountered during the creation of the digital graphic products. These might
include, for instance, issues surrounding copyright, eSafety and the use of
content appropriate for the target audience.
terms of audience, purpose and original requirements, and justify any changes that
were made, explaining the rationale for those changes. The evaluation should include
an explanation of how the resolution, size and compression of the final products
make them fit for purpose and audience. Learners should also recommend at least
three improvements but they do not need to implement them.
114
Research
Technology
Products
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
How would you improve these products?

What are their strengths?
Consider whether these products are fit for

purpose, and how they affect the audience.
How have they been designed to be used in
promotion?
Review at least two different graphic products

used in advertising and explain their features,
including technical qualities, content and
purpose.
115
You work for a company that makes technology

products. You are asked to produce graphics for
a promotional campaign for a new smartphone.
Before you design your products, you must
review graphics that are used currently.
Assessment evidence
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
A Promotional
Campaign
2B.P2, 2B.P3
2B.M2, 2B.D2,
116
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Assignment
Criteria covered
A sources table of ready-made

assets.
You need to design two graphic products to be

used in the campaign.
Justify how this design meets the brief for

your products.
Provide a sources table for the ready-made

assets.
Describe why the products will be fit for

The brief will include further requirements.
an advert including an image(s) of the

product in use and compressed appropriately
for viewing on screen (the website used to
advertise the smartphone) and on paper
(high-end magazine).
a user guide line drawing(s) of the product

illustrating the size and main features
Design one vector and one bitmap graphic

product, both including text. The graphics
should include:
Design documents or prototypes

including description of purpose and
audience, list of ready-made assets,
and illustrations of the products
Assessment evidence
Your graphics need to be used to promote a new

smartphone. The smartphone is aimed at the
1625 age group and offers options to target
both sexes.
Scenario
The original and ready-made digital graphics

should be prepared, created and combined with
text to provide the main illustration for a user
guide for the smartphone and an advert for the
smartphone.
Create Graphics
Review
2C.P4, 2C.P5,
2C.M3, 2C.M4,
2C.D3 (1.C4, 1C.5)
2C.P6, 2C.M5,
2C.D4, (1C.6)
Evaluate the final products, justifying how they

meet the briefs and are fit for purpose and
suitable for the audience. Suggest improvements
you would make if you designed these products
again and consider any constraints.
Check that the products are fit for purpose

and audience, while considering the original
requirements, and make any improvements
as necessary.
Test the products for quality, e.g. images are

cropped appropriately and accurately, and vector
lines join or backgrounds are removed from
images competently.
Update the sources table.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Evaluation report.
117
(Files prepared to suit both types of

specified media).
o an advert
o a user guide illustration
Finished products in a suitable digital

file format:
Evidence of testing and feedback,

e.g. completed questionnaire or
witness statement
Completed graphic assets in native or

compressed file types
Digital files of original graphic assets
Digital files of ready-made graphic

assets
Assessment evidence
118
UNIT 7: CREATING DIGITAL VIDEO

Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Video is one of the most powerful ways to convey a message in modern society and
different types of video are transmitted worldwide. These range from a documentary
or news item that can change minds and encourage people to take action to a movie
that will entertain, or a well-made advert that can increase product sales or raise
money for a charity. Job roles which use digital video include camera operators who
capture original footage, and editors who use computers to manipulate the original
footage and combine it with other assets such as animations, audio and text.
In this unit you will investigate the range of applications and features of digital video
products which have been created for a specific audience and purpose. You will apply
some of your findings to your own digital products.
You will be given a brief to fulfil and will be introduced to the technology and
techniques professionals use. You will need to think about the creative aspects of the
product, as well as the technical. You will need to record original video assets and
combine these with other assets, e.g. audio, as required. You will review your
finished product having obtained feedback from others and evaluate possible
improvements.
optional specialist units: Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio, and Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics. In addition, it supports the content of Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation,
Learning aims
A understand the applications and features of digital video products
B design a digital video product
C create, test and review a digital video product.
119

Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital video
products
Applications of digital video products
Applications and purpose, including:
a range of different existing digital video products/recordings (e.g. a TV news
segment, a sketch for a comedy show, a section of documentary, a TV advert,
a movie trailer, machinima)
the effect (e.g. evoke emotion, educate, entertain, inform) that they have on
different audiences (e.g. age, gender, interest, need).
Features of digital video
Features, e.g.:
file types (.avi, .mpeg, etc.)
file sizes
timing and length
quality
codecs
platforms and compatibility
resolution (e.g. HD, for web)
bit rate
frames per second
layers (soundtrack, narrative, etc.).
120

Learning aim B: Design a digital video product
Design documents
Designs include:
intended audience (age, gender, interests), purpose and the requirements defined in
the brief
initial design ideas
script (e.g. what will be included in the product, dialogue, instructions, effects,
stage directions)
storyboard outlining the main panels of action showing characters, scenery, props
and sounds and identifying timing, camera angles and flow
list of ready-made digital assets (audio speech, music and/or sound effects,
graphics, and video recordings of any type). Sources for ready-made assets must be
documented and referenced
recording schedule (e.g. the day(s) on which learners plan to record, the equipment
they will need and the people who will be involved).
logsheet (log of what scenes are recorded and their details)
health and safety considerations of filming (e.g. trailing cables, risk of falling,
slippery surfaces, sharp objects, heavy equipment and the environment where the
recording will take place)
Carry out a recce (reconnaissance, an initial investigation) for the filming location(s):
types of location, e.g.:
o exterior
o interior
o stage
considerations, e.g.:
o indoor/outdoor
o lighting
o ambient sounds
o weather
o legalities (e.g. need to obtain permission, health and safety)
o transport
o security
Recruit a cast/crew:
types of cast (e.g. lead actors, secondary actors, extras)
job roles of crew, e.g.:
o director
o cinematographer (cameraman)
o sound recordist
o lighting technician.
121

Learning aim C: Create, test and review a digital video product
Recording original video clips
Features of video recording equipment:
digital video equipment: zoom, pan, placement of camera, use of tripod, camera
angles, specifications of cameras (e.g. DV tape or digital storage, images sensors
e.g. CMOS/CCDs, connectivity to editing machine, cost)
screen capture software: screen region, mouse pointer, narration.
Understand the difference between original video clips recorded onto tape and digital
formats, and the saved digital format (usually .dv) and other wrapped formats
(e.g. .avi, .qt), which are known as assets.
Create a video product
Gather ready-made video, audio and/or graphic asset(s) from other sources
(e.g. internet, other media such as CD or DVD).
Video editing software, e.g.:
import video files and other files (e.g. music)
editing tools and techniques, e.g.:
o cut, copy, paste and delete clips
o split and trim clips
o transitions
o text
effects tools and techniques, e.g.:
o filters
o overlays
o layering (video and audio)
o picture in picture
video quality tools and techniques, e.g.:
o contrast
o sharpen
o saturation
o white balance.
continued
122

Test the video product
Test the video products for functionality during editing (e.g. checking that the clips
play and volume levels are appropriate, picture quality is usable, products are the
correct length).
Gather feedback from others, including quality (e.g. that they only capture what is
needed, the clips flow together well, timing is accurate, sound quality high minimal
or no noise, picture quality is high, and video is appropriate for audience
and purpose).
Document any improvements, updating the sources table for ready-made assets.
Render the video (if required) into a suitable final size and format (e.g. .avi, .flv,
.mpeg, .mov, .wmv). Understand the process of rendering and the reasons for doing it
and consider technical aspects (e.g. format, file size, bandwidth, length, compression,
frames per second (fps), bit rate).
Review the video product
Review the finished video product for:
quality
legal and ethical constraints, e.g. copyright, eSafety and suitable content
123
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit

two different digital
video products.

two different digital
video products.
124
Produce an outline
design for a video
product.
1B.3
an outline storyboard.
an outline script
The design must include:

and purpose for the
design of a digital video
product.
1B.2
a list of any readymade assets if used.#
a cast/crew list
a storyboard
a script
description of
requirements from
the brief
2B.P3 Produce a design for a

video product of at least
5 minutes duration. The
design must include:

and purpose for the
design of a digital video
product.
Learning aim B: Design a digital video product
1A.1
meet the needs of

the audience.#
fulfil the stated

purpose and
requirements in the
brief

the designs will:

and weaknesses of one
digital video product.
Level 2 Distinction
recce of filming
locations.#
logsheet
The design must include:
2B.M2 Produce a detailed video

design, including reasons
why alternative ideas
have been discarded.

their intended effect on
the audience.
Learning aim A: Understand the applications and features of digital video products
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Edit original video clips

and, if required, any
other assets to create a
video product of at least
3 minutes duration, and
test for functionality,
with guidance.
1C.5
Test the product for

functionality and
purpose, checking that
it meets the original
any necessary
improvements to
the products.
2C.P5 Edit original video clips,

if required, audio clips
and ready-made assets
to create a video product
of at least 5 minutes
duration.
2C.P4 Record video clips and,

if required, additional
audio clips and prepare
any other assets,
demonstrating
with sources of assets
listed.
others about quality of
the product and use it to
improve the product,
demonstrating
and purpose.
2C.M3 Record high-quality

video clips,
demonstrating
with all sources for
assets fully referenced.
Record video clips and,

if required, prepare any
other assets, with
guidance.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Create, test and review a digital video product
Level 1
125
2C.D3 Refine video and other

assets to create a highquality video product.
Level 2 Distinction
126
2C.D4 Evaluate the final video

product and the initial
designs and justify any
changes made, making
recommendations for

which the final video
product meets the needs
of audience and the
purpose, considering
2C.P6 For the final video

product, explain how the
final product is suitable
for the intended
1C.6
For the final video

product, identify how the
final product is suitable
for the intended purpose.
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Merit
Level 2 Pass
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
video cameras either video recorders or screen capture software, e.g. Camtasia,
Fraps or screen capture software for other material, e.g. game console footage
Hauppauge PVR (personal video recorder)
video-editing software, e.g. Adobe Premiere (Pro or Elements), Sony Vegas,
Final Cut (Express or Pro).
Learners need access to a suitable assignment brief, a cast and crew, and if required,
audio equipment. Teachers should consider the maximum length of product
appropriate for the brief.
Assessment guidance
Evidence for this unit will require learners to show they understand the features of
video, and the processes involved in filming and editing digital clips. They will also
need to demonstrate practical skills in designing, creating original recordings, editing,
testing and reviewing a digital video product of their own, to meet a given brief that
outlines requirements for the product. It is not acceptable to produce the product
without using digital video editing software. Learners will need to record original
video material: they cannot just use ready-made assets edited together.
To achieve all grading criteria, learners should have access to existing digital
video products for investigation. They should also have access to equipment and
software to allow them to produce their own video product through editing and
testing video assets.
Please note that:
it is not acceptable to use Windows Movie Maker editing software because, at the
time of writing, the software does not provide the required technical functionality
the video recording must be captured on digital cameras, either on hard drive or
DAT tapes, rather than on 8 mm celluloid or similar.
Learning aim A
Learners should investigate two existing digital video products for different purposes
and consider features about the technical qualities, the content, and intended
audience and purpose. Learners should be encouraged to choose their own clips, and
to investigate different types of digital video products, such as a TV news segment,
an outside broadcast for breakfast TV, a sketch for a comedy show, a section of
documentary, a TV advert, movie trailer or training film. The two digital video
products should be designed for different purposes.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the purpose of the video clip and the use of
features in the clip, including file type, file size, length, quality, any codecs used,
resolution, frames per second and describe any use of layers.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose of video product and
limited features, including file type, file size, length and quality.
For 2A.M1: learners should review whether the clips are fit for purpose, and their
intended effect on the audience.
127
For 2A.D1: learners should look at one digital video product in more detail and
discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least
one strength and one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should design their own digital video product to a given brief. The video
should be at least 5 minutes long, but no longer than 10 minutes, for learners aiming
to achieve a Level 2 Pass. Learners should consider health and safety constraints of
filming, (e.g. trailing cables, risk of falling, slippery surfaces, sharp objects, heavy
equipment and choice of location).
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the creation of a digital video product
as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: learners should describe the intended audience and purpose of the
product, relating this to design ideas.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the intended audience and
purpose for the video product.
For 2B.P3: learners will produce design ideas for a digital video product. Learners
should describe any requirements for the product (as outlined in the brief). They
should create a script and storyboard showing at least six main panels. The script
should include the people involved (cast and crew), and give an overview of what will
be included in the video. The storyboard should give an idea of what will happen from
beginning to end, although it might not cover all aspects.
Learners should produce:
a cast/crew list showing names of those involved, and the role they will take
a list of any ready made-assets to be used.
The learner can use a recording schedule to plan and organise the production of
their video.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce an outline design for their video
product. An outline design would contain a script which may not be complete and a
storyboard, which should include at least three main panels that should give an
indication of what the video product will be about and what will be included.
For 2B.M2: learners should produce detailed design documents, including outlines
of alternative ideas and why they have discarded them, e.g. an outline of variations
on the script or alternative audiences for their products. These should not be fully
worked-up designs, but annotations or sketches to demonstrate the development
in their design process.
Learners should give more detail in their design documents, considering purpose,
intended audience and requirements given in the brief. This should include an
explanation of what the learner must include in the designs to fulfil requirements,
e.g. My target audience is x, therefore the video product needs to include . The
designs should be developed to include a detailed script that includes all dialogue,
stage directions and instructions to cast and crew, including any equipment, e.g.
camera positions. The documents should include a detailed storyboard, which
includes at least 12 main panels and explains the action in detail. Information about
timing and transitions between scenes should be noted, and the learner should
include a logsheet to note which scenes/clips are recorded, their timing and details,
and evidence of recce(s) to filming location(s). Learners can also include any
prototype video and audio clip(s) in their design documents, but these should be
draft versions only, and not the final versions of clips.
128
To meet this criterion, a learner does not need to record video at more than one
filming location, but if their design requires multiple locations, then learners must
complete multiple recces.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify why they chose the final design ideas from the
alternative ideas outlined for the Merit criteria. Learners should explain how each
asset helps meet the stated purpose and requirements in the brief, including
reference to the script, storyboard, logsheet and recce report.
Learners may wish to do this by annotating their designs and describing why they
have chosen an idea, e.g. I have used a fade transition in here because. They
should also justify why they have chosen to combine assets in this way to fulfil the
brief, and why the chosen design was selected.
Learning aim C
Learners should prepare and carry out filming and prepare (create and gather)
additional assets, such as music, graphics or sound effects. Learners should use
these to create their planned digital video product. Although learners may deviate
slightly from their plans (as happens with any project), they should aim to produce a
final product that closely resembles their design. Any major changes should be noted
on their design, with a brief reason for the change, e.g. had to change an actor due
to illness or found a different piece of music that better matched the images.
For 2C.P4: learners should carry out the filming at the locations where they have
done their recce(s), using the people in their cast/crew list. Learners should prepare
and gather any other ready-made assets they need, such as music, sound effects or
graphics. Learners should demonstrate an awareness of purpose for the product,
while considering any requirements from the brief. The assets should have the
sources they have used listed in a source table.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have made original recordings and
prepared and gathered any other assets needed, such as music. The quality of their
filming and original video clips may be low and/or incomplete. Learners will need
guidance to complete the recording and preparation.
For 2C.M3: learners should ensure that their recordings are of a high quality,
meaning that their video clips only capture what is needed, sound recording is clear
and free from most noise, and the images are of a good quality. Learners should
demonstrate an awareness of the audience. The bibliography of gathered sources
should be detailed enough for another person to find all the specific sources used.
For 2C.P5: learners should edit their original video clips and gathered assets into
their designed digital product. Their product should certainly be at least 5 minutes
duration, and no more than 10 minutes. Learners should also test their product for
functionality, purpose, and against any requirements in the brief. Testing should
include checking that the clips play, volume levels are appropriate, picture quality is
usable, products are of the correct length, and the product follows the order in the
storyboard. Improvements should be based on the results of testing.
If required, when learners have completed their video product, the product should
be rendered and available in a suitable file type to enable review and feedback.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have edited their original and ready-made
clips to create a video product of least 3 minutes duration. Learners may need
guidance to create their digital video product. Learners should test their product for
functionality (that the assets play and have suitable volume levels), with guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners should gather feedback from at least one other person about
the quality of their products. They should then respond to the feedback to improve
the video, demonstrating awareness of audience and purpose.
129
iterative.
The product should be refined to a high quality, meaning it is clear, the assets flow
well and are synchronised, the timing is accurate and the sound and picture quality is
high. The product should be refined, using feedback from others where appropriate.
Learners should ensure there are copies of both the initial and the refined versions of
their video clips, with annotations on the designs where appropriate.
and purpose. Learners should give at least one reason for audience and one for
purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their product is fit for
purpose, for example, My video is an educational video so it has short scenes and
has a summary screen at the end.
For 2C.M5: learners should build on the strengths, weaknesses and explanations in
the Pass criteria to review how much the product is suitable for the intended
at least one other person. This could be asking a peer or test buddy to review their
video product to suggest strengths, weaknesses and improvements (either written or
recorded evidence). Alternatively, the class teacher (or a different teacher) could
provide feedback. Learners should use this feedback when considering how suitable
their product is. Learners must consider and explain any legal and health and safety
constraints they encountered during the creation of the digital video products, for
example, copyright constraints that affected the assets they used. They should
consider health and safety in terms of using their equipment and filming on location.
Their explanations should include typical health and safety measures, such as no
trailing cables and no bare wires, and consider individual aspects relating to their
filming locations.
For 2C.D4: learners should evaluate their final product against the initial design,
identifying good and bad points, justifying why their product meets the needs of the
audience, is fit for purpose and meets the brief, and justify changes made between
the design and final product. They should make recommendations for at least three
improvements. They do not need to act on the improvements.
130
Research
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
What could be improved in the clip? What are

the strengths of the clip?
Match these features to the target audience and

analyse the impact of the clip on the audience.
Review at least three existing and different

digital video products/clips and explain features
about the technical qualities, content and the
message/purpose.
You work for a TV company that produces a

breakfast TV programme. Youve been asked
to produce a new segment for the programme,
providing a round-up of funny news items.
Before you design a pilot segment to show the
producers of the programme, you need to
research existing video segments.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
machinima.
a training film (e.g. how to use screen capture software)
a movie trailer
a TV advert
a section of documentary
a sketch for a comedy show
an outside broadcast for breakfast TV
a TV news segment
Possible scenarios for this unit include:
131
Assessment evidence
Record all original video clips and, if required,

audio clips. Prepare any additional assets
needed and describe any relevant constraints.
Make sure you have noted any health and safety
issues or legal issues for your TV segment.
Edit the original video clips and assets into

a digital video product. Render the finished
TV segment into a suitable file format if you
need to.
Production and
Post-production
Editing and Testing
2C.P4, 2C.M3
(1C.4)
2C.P5, 2C.M4,
2C.D3, (1C.5)
132
Design a video clip based on the requirements of

the brief you have been given by the producers
of the programme. Explain the purpose and
target audience.
Pre-production
2B.P2,2B.P3
2B.M2 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Completed video clip in rendered

format.
Completed video clip in native format.
Report of legal issues.
Documentation of health and safety

issues when filming (perhaps using
annotated photographs).
Digital files of acquired assets.
Digital files of original video clips and,

if required audio clips, demonstrating
range of skills used.
Prototype clips.
Design documentation, including

description of purpose and audience,
script, storyboard, recording
schedule, logsheet, cast/crew list
and recce report.
Assessment evidence
Test that your clip is functional and get feedback

from another person on your video. Is it fit for
purpose? Is it suitable for the audience? Amend
your clip to make sure it meets the original
requirements in the brief.
Justify how this design entirely meets the brief

from the producers.
Consider any alternative ideas in the design for

the TV segment.
Recruit a cast/crew, and carry out a recce of

filming location(s).
Write a complete script and storyboard, and

create a recording schedule and logsheet.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Review
2C.P6, 2C.M5
2C.D4 (1C.6)
Your evaluation could be used to present your

thoughts and considerations to the producers in
order to be asked to do another TV segment.
Describe legal and/or ethical constraints,

and any health and safety considerations.
Obtain feedback from another person to act as

the viewer. Evaluate the final product and justify
why it meets the brief and suggest
improvements.
At the meeting with the producers, you will need

to show that your TV segment meets the brief,
the viewers will like it and you have reviewed
your design.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Evaluation report/ presentation.
133
Evidence of feedback, e.g. completed

questionnaire.
Assessment evidence
134
UNIT 8: MOBILE APPS DEVELOPMENT

Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
How many people do you know who have smartphones or mobile tablet devices? This
means that they are carrying considerable computer power around with them. There
has been an explosion of software applications, known as apps, to use on these
devices. You can use apps for many different purposes; for example, a location app
helps you to find your nearest shop, and a leisure app makes it easy to download
your favourite music.
Software developers and engineers have scrambled to meet the demand for mobile
apps, that are increasingly being used by businesses and organisations. The market
for Apple, Android and other apps have boomed. Software engineers are involved
with the design, development, testing and maintenance of apps. In addition, software
businesses that develop apps employ other professionals, including creative
designers, artists and sound engineers.
In this unit you will investigate the characteristics and uses of mobile apps, and learn
how mobile apps are developed. Then you will design, develop, test and review your
own mobile app. Rather than producing large amounts of original code from scratch,
the emphasis in this unit is on you integrating predefined programs/code snippets
(specific instructions for a mobile computer) with ready-made and original assets
(e.g. buttons and sounds) by using some original code. This will save you significant
amounts of time when developing your mobile app. You will review your finished app,
having obtained feedback from others, and evaluate possible improvements.
You may even be able to get it published on the internet and take pride in people
using an app you made.
In particular this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World and Unit 2:
Technology Systems. In addition, this unit develops the skills from the following
specialist units: Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation, Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio
and Unit 6: Creating Digital Graphics. It also complements the delivery of Unit 12:
Software Development.
Learning aims
A understand the characteristics and uses of mobile apps
B design a mobile app
C develop and test a mobile app
D review the finished mobile app.
135

Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics and uses of mobile apps
The purpose of mobile apps
Mobile apps are computer programs that instruct a computers Central Processing Unit
(CPU) to carry out the set of specific instructions given in a program for a specific
reason and use.
Typical uses of mobile apps
Know why we develop mobile apps and know typical uses, including:
to give information (e.g. BBC, photo, video, music)
for navigation (in the physical world) (e.g. location identification,
nearest tube stations, sandwich shop)
for entertainment (e.g. YouTube, Spotify)
for leisure and fitness (e.g. tracking fitness, RunKeeper)
for communication (e.g. Skype mobile, Live Messenger, Fone Time)
for augmented reality (e.g. Layar, Junaio).
Features of mobile apps
Key features and characteristics, e.g.:
purpose of the app
user requirements
user-friendliness (e.g. what are the features of the interface/screens that are
presented to the user? How does the user communicate with the app and make
things happen?)
dependence on particular hardware
interface elements
integration with standard operating-system software (e.g. contacts list,
text messaging)
platforms and compatibility.
Programming mobile apps
Know there are types of programming language; including C++, Java and XML.
Understand the reasons for compiling programs.
136

Learning aim B: Design a mobile app
Software development life cycle
Software development life cycle, including:
requirements of the problem
design specification (i.e. scope, inputs, outputs, processing, user interface)
constraints (i.e. programming language and timescales for development)
develop code
test
maintain code.
Designing a mobile app
Design to include:
purpose
user requirements or problem to solve.
a proposed solution using design tools, e.g.:
o a description of the main program tasks input and output format (e.g. to add
two numbers together and display a result)
o screen layouts and navigation including prototypes (initial splashscreen,
main activity screen, other screens or screen elements)
o algorithms with a description of the method of solution and processing structure
(flow charts, pseudocode and events)
o control structures
o data validation
a brief outline of alternative solutions for the intended app (e.g. screen layouts and
navigation)
a list of any pre-defined programs, or code snippets to be used
ready-made and original assets
o video, graphics, audio and animation, e.g. sprites, sounds, images, movies,
animations and buttons that will be integrated into the app (these are available
on the internet and other media, such as CD or DVD)
o all sources for pre-defined programs and ready-made assets documented and
referenced
test plan with test data (e.g. testing the inputs and expected outputs and compilation
of the code)
constraints (e.g. device capabilities, such as connectivity, screen size, memory
storage or programming language).
137

Learning aim C: Develop and test a mobile app
Preparing content to develop an app
Prepare and gather pre-defined programs, snippets and/or subroutines, and readymade and original assets.
Edit (using appropriate editing software) and optimise assets for a mobile platform
(e.g. sacrificing quality for smaller file size).
Use file formats that are appropriate for the intended platform.
Develop and refine an app
Use a development environment to write the code for a mobile app.
Integrate ready-made programs, code snippets and assets with some original code.
Use suitable program constructs to edit and create code:
command words, e.g.:
o comments
o constants (variables with a constant value that cannot change)
o operators; arithmetic ( +, -, *, /, %) and logical ( <, <=, >, >=, AND, OR,
true, false)
o reserved words that have special meaning within the programming language and
are used to write instructions in a program (e.g. in Java const and goto are
reserved words)
o input and output commands
o local variables (variables that only exist inside the subroutine/function where they
are declared and used)
o global variables (variables that exist throughout the entire program and in
subroutines/functions)
o assignment
o loops, (counter-controlled, conditional, iteration, [while do, repeatuntil,
forto do])
o sequential statements, selections (If then).
Subroutines/functions/procedures (e.g. reading in data, printing out information).
a range of data types, e.g.:
o character
o string (text)
o integer and real (numbers)
o Boolean.
basic string handling commands to examine individual characters and substrings.
continued
138

Event handling:
o forms
o assigning properties to screen components (e.g. buttons, boxes, data validation
and drop-down lists)
o actions.
Annotate code to demonstrate understanding and to allow effective repair/debugging of
the program.
When required, compile the program into a suitable format to create an executable
program.
Quality of software programs
Know that software design and techniques affect the quality of the app developed:
efficiency/performance, e.g. the amount of system resources a program consumes
(processor time, memory space, accessing storage media)
maintainability, i.e. the ease with which a program can be modified by its present or
future developers in order to carry out corrective, perfective or adaptive alterations
to the code
portability, i.e. the range of computer hardware and operating system platforms on
which the source code of a program can be run/compiled/interpreted
usability, i.e. the ease with which an end user can use the program for its intended
purpose or, in some cases, even unanticipated purposes.
Test the app
Test the program solution:
for functionality against the test plan with the test data
is fit for purpose
by reviewing the quality of the program in terms of efficiency/performance,
maintainability, portability and usability
gather feedback from others on the quality (efficiency/performance, maintainability,
portability and usability) of the solution.
Document any changes to the design, including changes to the source table for
pre-defined programs/snippets and ready-made assets.
Improve or refine the app (e.g. efficiency/performance, maintainability, portability,
usability).
139

Learning aim D: Review the finished mobile app
Review the app
Review the finished mobile app for:
user requirements
fitness for purpose
constraints (e.g. programming language, time, copyright, device capabilities
connectivity and screen size)
quality of the program (e.g. efficiency/performance, maintainability, portability,
usability)
140
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Identify the uses and

features of two different
apps.
2A.P1 Explain the uses and

features of two different
apps.
Produce a design for

a mobile app with
guidance, including an
outline of the proposed
solution.
1B.3
a list of sources for

any pre-defined code
and assets.#
a test plan
a list of any
pre-defined
codes/programs
a proposed solution

mobile app, including:
2B.P2 Describe the purpose

and user requirements
for the app.
test data.#
a detailed proposed
solution using a range
of design tools

design for a mobile app,
including:
2A.M1 Review how the features

of the apps affect the
usability and intended
use by the audience.
Identify the purpose and

user requirements for
the app.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design a mobile app
1A.1
Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics and uses of mobile apps
Level 1
Assessment criteria
any design
constraints.#
141
how they will fulfil the

purpose and the user
requirements
2B.D2 Justify the design

decisions, including:

and weaknesses of
the apps.
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
142
1C.6
Test the app for

functionality and
purpose, repairing any
faults and documenting
any changes made, with
guidance.
2C.P6 Test the app for

functionality and
any changes made.
commentary
throughout the code.*
constructs
constructs.*
2C.D3 Refine the app, taking

account of the quality of
the code and user
feedback.*
Level 2 Distinction

others on the usability of
the app, and use it to
improve the app,
demonstrating
and purpose.
2C.M4 Develop a functional

multi-screen app
containing original code,
that meets the user
requirements and
purpose.*
2C.P5 Edit predefined code and

integrate with assets to
develop an app which
includes:
one or more screens
Edit predefined code and

integrate with assets to
develop an app, with
guidance, containing:
1C.5
2C.M3 Optimise assets for the

app, demonstrating good
awareness of the user
requirements, with all
sources for assets fully
referenced.
Level 2 Merit
2C.P4 Prepare predefined code

snippets and assets for
the app, demonstrating
listing sources for assets
used.
one or more screens
Prepare predefined code

and assets with
guidance.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test a mobile app
Level 1
Level 2 Pass
For the final app, identify

how the final app is
suitable for the user
requirements and
purpose.
2D.P7 For the final app, explain

how the final app is
requirements and
purpose.
2D.M6 Review the extent to

which the final app
meets the user
requirements and
purpose, considering
Level 2 Merit
1D.7
Learning aim D: Review the finished mobile app
Level 1
143
2D.D4 Evaluate the final app

and the initial designs
and justify any changes
made to the quality of
the code, making
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
a software development kit for a mobile device programming language,
e.g. Android App Inventor
an onscreen emulator for a mobile device
example mobile device(s) on which to run apps
graphic and audio-editing software to edit and optimise ready-made and original
assets.
Teachers may wish to use an application such as Scratch to introduce learners to the
concepts of programming. Scratch is available free from
http://scratch.mit.edu/download.
Learners should be provided with a brief to design and develop an app, or decide on
their own user requirements and purpose for the app.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
In this learning aim, learners will investigate the characteristics of mobile apps and
how they are used.
For 2A.P1: learners should consider a range of existing mobile apps. It may be
beneficial to offer a selection of apps, preferably ones with a clear purpose and
audience, from which they can choose two. Learners should explain the features and
intended use of each app. The two apps should be designed for different purposes.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should be able to identify the purpose and some
of the features of at least two existing mobile apps, including presentation interface
elements and compatibility.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how the features of the two apps affect the
intended use, usability and appeal to the audience.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at one app in more detail and consider the strengths
and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least one strength and one
weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners are not expected to find their own problems or create their own project
brief. Suitable scenarios should allow learners to achieve all assessment criteria.
The user requirements should be given in the brief:
purpose of the software program
task(s) the software must perform
a list of the required user inputs and outputs
an outline of any processing/functions required.
144
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the development of the software
program as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3). For instance, a movie
showing snapshots throughout the development process would be appropriate, as
would an audio diary of the process, or blog entries as developments are made.
For 2B.P2: learners should describe the user requirements and purpose of the app
for their design, as well as the user requirements for their design.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose of the app and the
user requirements for the design.
For 2B.P3: for a given problem outlined in a brief, learners should design their
proposed solution. The design documents should include:
a proposed solution using basic design tools, including a description of the main
program tasks (data input and output, screen layouts and navigation, and
descriptions of the method of solution)
a list of any pre-defined programs/code snippets (including any functions or
sub-routines) and assets, documenting the sources appropriately
a test plan (to test for the logic and functionality).
Learners will produce design ideas for apps. Please note that learners do not have to
create original assets unless they choose to do so. The original assets may have been
produced in a unit such as Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio or Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should suggest an outline of a proposed solution
which will contain:
a description of the main program tasks input and output (e.g. to add two
numbers together and display a result)
screen layouts (input and output) templates or design sheets can be used to
help learners with their design.
For 2B.M2: in addition to the requirements for the pass grade, learners should
produce:
a detailed proposed solution, using a range of suitable tools (in addition to those
used at pass) such as flowcharts, control structures pseudocode, events, data
handling, and error handling and reporting)
a brief outline of any alternative solutions for the intended software program,
test data.
For 2B.D2: at this level, learners are expected to be able to justify their design
decisions and how the chosen design fulfils the purpose and user requirements.
They should consider the suitability for end users and the quality and thoroughness
of their design work. They also need to review their design in light of any constraints
(e.g. screen size) arising from the device and the programming language used.
Learners should explain why alternative designs were rejected.
Learning aim C
The designs will be used to create the mobile app. Although learners may deviate
from their designs (as happens with any project), they should aim to develop final
products that closely resemble their original design. The teacher should recognise
that the activities of gathering and preparing code and assets, along with original
code, is an iterative process.
145
For 2C.P4: learners should prepare (including gathering) predefined code and
ready-made assets, such as buttons and images, and list them in a table of sources
(please note, many assets will be included within the development environment, e.g.
buttons). Chosen assets should demonstrate awareness of user requirements and
purpose. The sources of assets should be listed.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should prepare ready-made assets required for
the app. This may include sprites, sounds, images, movies, animation and buttons
from a variety of sources. Learners will need guidance to prepare the assets and
code.
For 2C.M3: learners should optimise ready-made assets. For instance, bitmap
images should be optimised (e.g. be an appropriate file type and size to increase
the responsiveness of the app). Learners should demonstrate good awareness of
audience and purpose. All predefined code and assets should be fully listed in a
sources table, which should be detailed enough for another person to independently
obtain the assets used.
For 2C.P5: learners should integrate the pre-prepared code snippets and assets by
editing the code. They should then develop the app by:
creating an interface which demonstrates an awareness of the user requirements
and purpose of the app
assigning code to assets, e.g. buttons to control behaviour
writing comments within the code to explain how it works.
The interface may be a single screen with a number of assets that cause an event
to happen.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should integrate and edit the assets and code to
develop the app, with guidance. Their app should contain one or more screens and
simple constructs.
For 2C.M4: learners should edit defined code and develop some original code to fulfil
the design requirements of the app. The development process will include creating a
multi-screen interface that reflects the planned interface, with assets on each screen.
The app should be multifunctional.
For 2C.P6: learners should test the functionality of code, ensuring it is fit for
purpose and adjust the code as required to fix any problems. They should document
any changes to the program. Testing documentation might range from a simple
checklist to a more elaborate testing schedule that includes due dates for completion
of different parts of the project.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should, with support from the teacher, test the
app for functionality and fitness for purpose. They should fix any faults and document
their changes, with guidance.
For 2C.M5: learners should gather feedback from others when testing the app,
considering the user requirements and purpose of the app, and use it to improve the
app.
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the activities of developing and testing
computer programs is iterative process and not sequential. Consequently, the
Distinction criteria for this learning aim is assessed through using the learners work
from both the Pass and Merit criteria.
Learners should refine their mobile app, taking account of user feedback, where
appropriate to do so, and the quality of the code, e.g. maintainability (how easily
the code can be modified), portability (on different platforms) and usability. All of
the ideas from testing, feedback and improving their designs as they create the
apps should have been considered as how best to refine the product.
146
Learning aim D
For 2D.P7: for the final review, learners should be able to explain why their app is
suitable for the user requirements and purpose. Learners should give one reason for
audience and one for purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify why their app is suitable for the
user requirements and purpose. This could be achieved through a discussion with the
teacher about the outcomes of their project and evidence with a witness statement
and observation record.
For 2D.M6: for the final review, learners should review their app with others,
discussing the extent to which their solution meets the needs of the original
requirements and purpose of the app. Learners should consider how constraints,
user feedback and testing has affected the suitability of the app.
For 2D.D4: at this level, learners should evaluate their initial designs and the
completed app. They should identify any changes made from the design stage and
justify these changes.
Learners should make at least three specific suggestions for improvement for the
completed program to ensure it is fully functional, well coded and fit for purpose,
including considerations of any constraints, user requirements and purpose.
Learners do not need to implement the enhancements.
Programming constructs and techniques for level 1 assessment

It is recognised that some learners may fail to achieve a full Pass at level 2. Learners
being assessed for the level 1 criteria for learning aims B and C are therefore not
required to include all of the different programming constructs in their work for
assessment.
The constructs that learners working at level 1 should be familiar with and include in
their assessment evidence are shown below.
Use program constructs e.g.:
command words:
o comments
o constants (variables with a constant value that cannot change)
o arithmetic operators ( +, -)
o reserved words which have special meaning within the programming language
and are used to write instructions in a program e.g. in Java const and goto are
reserved words
o local variables only exist inside the subroutine/function where they are declared
and used
o global variables exist throughout the entire program and in subroutines/functions
o assignment
o counter controlled loops.
a range of data types, e.g.:
o string (text)
147
event handling:
o forms
o assigning properties to screen components (e.g. buttons, boxes and
drop down lists)
o actions.
148
Reviewing Apps
Design an
Interactive Alphabet
App
2A.P1, 2A.M1,
2A.D1, (1A.1)
2B.P2, 2B.M2,
2B.P3, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
alternative ideas for designs
test plan
proposed solution
list of assets or code
Designs should include:
You should describe how your design meets the

user requirements and purpose.
A leading educational publisher has asked you to

develop an interactive app. The app is intended
to help children learn their alphabet. Learners
should design an interactive app which will
include pre-defined and edited code with assets.
They have asked you to prepare a presentation

that describes the purpose, quality and features
of both these apps.
create a guidebook for a major city.
support people with their learning and

development
Your manager wants to know how mobile apps

could be used to:
Your manager is going to ask you to lead on

an app design project, and to investigate
educational mobile apps currently available.
You work for a publishing company that is

moving into increasing its digital publishing
for handheld devices and smartphones.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Screens (input and output).
Report.
List of tools, functions and

subroutines.
149
Processing structures, e.g. flowcharts

and structure diagrams.
Presentation.
Assessment evidence
Review the App
2D.P7, 2D.M6,
2D.D4, (1D.7)
150
You should now have everything you need to

develop your interactive learning app.
Developing and
Testing
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5,
2C.M4, (1C.5),
2C.P6, 2C.M5,
(1C.6), 2C.D3
Justify where your design has changed through

the development, including what has changed
following feedback, and explain how you would
improve the program further.
Evaluation report.
User feedback.
Annotated design.
Consider strengths and points you could improve

in your design.
How suitable is your app for the audience and
purpose? Does it meet the user requirements?
Annotated code.
Source table for assets.
Test plans and data.
Functional apps.
User feedback.
Annotated design.
Annotated code.
Assessment evidence
How could the app be improved?
6. Review and refine your app in light of

feedback.
5. Get feedback from one other person on the

app, including how easy it is to use and the
quality of the code.
4. Test the app against the test plan, checking

the user requirements are still being met,
and document any changes to the app.
Correct any errors in the app.
3. Develop the interactive app, using the

predefined programs/code that you have
gathered. Edit pre-defined code and any
original code to create the app. Do not forget
to include commentary within the code.
2. Reference sources in a table.
1. Gather, prepare and optimise predefined

programs/code snippets and assets (e.g.
images, sound, video) that you will use in
the interactive app.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
UNIT 9: SPREADSHEET DEVELOPMENT

Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Spreadsheets are used to store, manipulate and analyse data and to present it in
easy-to-understand ways. They are invaluable for collecting and manipulating data of
all types. Spreadsheets can be formatted to create clear, concise reports and can be
sorted, filtered and updated with the touch of a button.
Spreadsheets are used extensively in many organisations to help people carry out
their job roles. For instance, accountants use spreadsheets to keep track of the
money going into and out from a business, and scientists use them to analyse the
results of their experiments and record the data for use in the future.
In this unit you will understand the many uses for spreadsheets and the tools and
techniques that are available and become skilled at using them. You will be able to
apply some of your findings to your own spreadsheet solutions.
In this unit, you will understand the many uses for spreadsheets. You will discover
the many tools and techniques that are available in spreadsheet software and will
become skilled at using them. You will investigate some of the ways spreadsheets
used in real-life. You will design a spreadsheet solution for a brief. You will then
develop and test your spreadsheet solution to store, manipulate and analyse a large
amount of data and present the output data in easy-to-understand way. Once
completed, you will review the finished spreadsheet solution having obtained
feedback from others, and evaluate possible improvements.
In particular, this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World and Unit 2:
Technology Systems. In addition, it supports the content of Unit 10: Database
Development.
Learning aims
A understand the uses of spreadsheets and the features available in spreadsheet
software packages
B design a spreadsheet
C develop and test a spreadsheet
D review the finished spreadsheet.
151

Learning aim A: Understand the uses of spreadsheets and the features
available in spreadsheet software packages
What is a spreadsheet?
Spreadsheet software stores, manipulates and analyses large amounts of data
accurately and to present the output data in an easy-to-understand way.
How and why spreadsheets are used
Know why organisations use spreadsheets, e.g.:
improve productivity and accuracy
support decision making (e.g. scenario modelling, goal seek, regression and
data mining)
present information
analyse data
perform calculations
manipulate large datasets.
Activities where spreadsheets are used, e.g.:
cost modelling (e.g. in small- and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs))
analysis of data (e.g. scientific experiments or market research)
tracking progress and recording results (e.g. homework and test results in a school
or college)
creating timetables and results (e.g. league table information for a football league)
stock control (e.g. in a shop or manufacturing organisation).
Features of spreadsheet software
Tools and techniques (e.g. cell replication and formatting, page setup and user
interfaces (as listed in learning aim C)).
Purpose of tools and techniques (e.g. aid usability, productivity, accuracy and the
presentation of output data).
152

Learning aim B: Design a spreadsheet
Designing a spreadsheet
Designs include:
intended purpose and user requirements
design documentation that includes
o worksheet structure diagram showing the proposed layout, calculations/processes
(e.g. formulae and functions) and data input method (e.g. labeling and row and
column use, forms, cell formatting, validation, conditional formatting)
o user input interface identifying appropriate tools/techniques.
o user output data (e.g. ideas for presentation showing format(s) and
tools/techniques)
o onscreen user navigation and guidance (e.g. navigation prompts, input messages
and validation (including lists))
o test plan with test data to test functionality (e.g. test, expected result,
actual result)
o a brief outline of alternative design ideas (e.g. choice of calculations and artistic
style of the solution).
153

Learning aim C: Develop and test a spreadsheet
Developing a spreadsheet solution
Use spreadsheet software tools and techniques, e.g.:
cell manipulation (e.g. entering and editing data, autofilling, replication,
conditional formatting (to highlight outcomes))
cell formatting (e.g. colours, shading, merging cells, alignment)
data manipulation (e.g. filters, sorts, pivot tables)
formulae (e.g. add, subtract, divide, multiply)
functions (e.g. sum, average, count and countIF, lookup, index)
logical functions (e.g. IF, AND, OR, NOT)
data validation
relative and absolute cell referencing
boxes (e.g. lists, drop-down)
data entry forms
lookup tables
nested IF functions
cell protection
types of charts and graphs (e.g. bar, pie)
chart and graph formatting (e.g. titles, resizing, labels)
worksheets (e.g. headers, page breaks, links)
conditional formatting
named ranges, relative and absolute cell referencing
goal seek what if function
macros.
Test and refine a spreadsheet
Test the spreadsheet solution for functionality and usability.
Provide onscreen user navigation and instructions.
Gather feedback from others, e.g. on user requirements, functionality, user experience
(e.g. usability, performance, adaptability to different scenarios).
Improvements and/or refinements to the spreadsheet solution, e.g. adaptability,
usability, productivity.
154

Learning aim D: Review the finished spreadsheet
Reviewing the spreadsheet solution
Review the finished spreadsheet solution against:
user requirements
fitness for purpose
user experience (e.g. usability, performance, adaptability)
155
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Level 2 Distinction
Identify how
spreadsheets are used
for two different
activities and how the
features are used in the
spreadsheets.
2A.P1 Explain how

spreadsheets are used
for two different
activities, and how the
features are used in the
spreadsheets.
156
With guidance, produce

a design for a
spreadsheet including:
1B.3
worksheet structure
diagram.

the spreadsheet.
1B.2
a test plan.
how output data is

to be presented
worksheet structure
diagram

spreadsheet, including:

for the spreadsheet
Learning aim B: Design a spreadsheet
1A.1
any constraints to
the design.
how the spreadsheet

solution will fulfil the
stated purpose and
user requirements
2B.D2 Justify final design


spreadsheets.
test data.
detailed worksheet
structure diagram
2B.M2 Produce detailed designs

for a spreadsheet,
including:

in the spreadsheets
could improve
productivity, accuracy
and usability.
Learning aim A: Understand the uses of spreadsheets and the features available in spreadsheet software packages
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
With guidance, test

the spreadsheet for
functionality and
purpose, and repair any
faults, documenting any
changes made.*
1C.5

others on usability, and
use it to improve the
spreadsheet, testing the
additional functionality
and repair any faults.*
2C.P5 Test the spreadsheet for

and repair any faults,
documenting any
changes made.*
For the final

spreadsheet, identify
how the final
spreadsheet is suitable
for the purpose.
2D.P6 For the final

spreadsheet, explain
how the final
spreadsheet is
requirements and
purpose.
1D.6
2D.M5 Review the extent

to which the final
spreadsheet meets
the user requirements
and purpose while
from others.
2C.M3 Refine the spreadsheet

to improve usability and
accuracy using onscreen
user navigation and
guidance.
Level 2 Merit
2C.P4 Develop a spreadsheet

with a given realistic
data set, containing a
user interface for data
input and presentation
of output data.
Learning aim D: Review the finished spreadsheet
With guidance, develop a

spreadsheet with a given
realistic dataset.
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test a spreadsheet
Level 1
157
2D.D4 Evaluate the final

spreadsheet against the
initial designs and justify
any changes that were
made, making
recommendations for
further improvements
to the spreadsheet.
2C.D3 Refine the spreadsheet

using automated
tools/techniques to
improve productivity,
accuracy and
presentation of
output data.*
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resource for this unit is access to spreadsheet editing software. Learners
will need to be given example spreadsheets and an assessment brief, giving a
situation that requires a spreadsheet solution.
Learners should produce a spreadsheet solution to a problem in a given brief and
with either a given dataset. The user requirements in the assessment brief should
include:
the purpose of the spreadsheet
the task(s) the spreadsheet must perform
the information the spreadsheet must supply, in what form, to whom
an outline of the required processing/calculations.
This unit assumes that learners already have a basic understanding of and ability
to use spreadsheets which cover basic spreadsheet tools and techniques such as
using formulae, e.g. add, subtract, divide and multiply.
Learners can devise their own brief, but it must be approved by the centre before
being used for assessment.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
For 2A.P1: learners should explain how two spreadsheets are used in the real world, for
example to measure performance over time or to calculate profit and loss. They should
describe how the tools and techniques included in the spreadsheets are used. The two
spreadsheets should be designed for different purposes.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how two spreadsheets are used in the
real world and identify how the features (e.g. formulae, layout) are used in two given
spreadsheets.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how the features (e.g. functions, layout, structure)
could improve productivity, accuracy and usability in the spreadsheets.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the spreadsheets in more detail and consider the
strengths and weaknesses of the spreadsheets. They should discuss at least one
Learning aim B
Learners need to design a spreadsheet solution for a specific purpose.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the development of the spreadsheet as
part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: learners should describe the user requirements and purpose of the
spreadsheet in their designs.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose and the user
requirements for their spreadsheet design.
158
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have created an outline design for their
spreadsheet solution, with guidance. An outline design would contain worksheet
layout and data input diagram. Some annotations should indicate the processes and
appropriate tools/techniques used, e.g. functions and formulas. This will give an
indication of what the product would be like and what it is about.
For 2B.P3: learners should design a spreadsheet solution. This should be a workable
design and should include:
a worksheet structure diagram including calculations and tools/techniques to be
applied, e.g. cell formatting, functions, formulas, IF statements
output data presenting the results/outcome
a test plan.
For 2B.M2: the detailed spreadsheet design will contain:
a brief description of alternative solutions, e.g. choice of calculations and style
a detailed worksheet structure diagram indicating data validation (including lists),
e.g. multiple worksheets, cell referencing, input messages, error messages,
macros, cell protection and navigation between multiple worksheets
test data, e.g. test, expected result, actual result.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify their design decision, explaining how they meet
the brief. Learners may wish to do this by annotating their design documents and
describing why (e.g. I have used a function here because ). They should also
justify why they have chosen a specific design to fulfil the brief in terms of purpose
and user requirements. Learners should explain why alternative designs were
rejected, and consider any constraints.
Learning aim C
Learners designs will be used to create the spreadsheet solution. Although learners
may deviate from their designs (as happens with any project), they should aim to
create a final spreadsheet that closely resembles their original design (unless there
is a good reason not to).
For 2C.P4: learners will develop a spreadsheet solution for a given purpose to
meet the brief. The spreadsheet will contain a user interface for data input and
for the presentation of output data. It will include simple functions and formulae.
Data for the spreadsheet will be sorted and the spreadsheet will be formatted
appropriately to promote ease of use. Learners will have created either a chart
or a graph to present the result/output from the spreadsheet solution.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should develop a spreadsheet solution for a brief.
The solution should include formulae and simple functions, some formatting, and
basic output to present the outcome/result.
For 2C.M3: learners will refine their spreadsheet solution to improve the usability of
their spreadsheet. Onscreen user navigation and guidance includes:
input messages
validation (including lists)
error messages
navigation prompts and guidance
conditional formatting
labels
data-entry forms
a commentary explaining the output presentation.
159
For 2C.P5: learners should test the functionality of the spreadsheet and make
changes based on these tests to repair any faults. The spreadsheet should be fully
functional and fit for purpose. Changes to the spreadsheet should be documented:
different versions from stages of development could be used to evidence this.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should test the spreadsheet solution for
functionality and purpose and repair any faults, with guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners should test the functionality of any additional tools/techniques
used, repair any faults and gather feedback on their spreadsheet from potential
users, and use it to improve the spreadsheet. They should cover the ease of use of
the spreadsheet solution, both in terms of the storage, manipulation and analysis of
data and the data output presentation.
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the process of developing and testing
a spreadsheet is iterative, and not a sequential process. Learners will refine the
spreadsheet solution using automated tools/techniques to improve productivity,
accuracy and the presentation of output data. Automated tools/techniques used
to do this include macros, links, named ranges and pivot tables.
spreadsheet solution should have been considered as how best to refine the product.
Learning aim D
Learners will complete a review of their finished spreadsheet solutions. This is a
reflective exercise to establish what the strengths and areas for improvement of the
solution are against the purpose and user requirements.
For 2D.P6: learners should have assessed the functionality of their spreadsheet and
should explain why their spreadsheet is suitable for user requirements and purpose.
Learners should try to avoid identifying mundane points such as the colour used
(unless that is particularly important) and instead think about why their solution
is appropriate and how it can be made more appropriate.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their spreadsheet is suitable
for the purpose and user requirements.
For 2D.M5: learners should review the extent of how their spreadsheet solution
meets the brief, based on feedback, and consider how the spreadsheet measures
up against the original purpose and user requirements.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their final spreadsheet solution against the
initial designs and justify any changes made. Learners should make at least three
recommendations for how they could further improve their spreadsheet.
160
Application of
Spreadsheets
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
For two given spreadsheets, you should present

two reports entitled Top 10 spreadsheet
tools/techniques. They should highlight their use
in the spreadsheets, describe their purpose, and
explain how these tools/techniques improve
productivity, accuracy and usability.
Before you design a spreadsheet for one of these

uses, you must investigate ways in which
different organisations use spreadsheets. Your
manager is keen to make their spreadsheet
systems as efficient as possible.
manage the results, fixtures and league table

information for the club.
161
Top 10 spreadsheet tools/techniques

in the form of pamphlet, presentation
report or demonstration for a
meeting.
Your manager wants you to investigate

spreadsheets which could:
manage the season ticket holder information
Evidence of independent research into

how organisations use spreadsheets
Assessment evidence
You are completing a placement with the local

football club in the administration department.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
a profit-and-loss model for a clothing/sports shop, including incoming and outgoing stock.
a costing model for a charity event
fixtures, results and league table information for a football league
a membership list for a pop bands fan club showing age ranges and location of members
a spreadsheet showing potential costs for a series of mobile phone tariffs
Learners should have access to an assessment brief that outlines the purpose and user requirements and a suitable data set
(of at least 50 rows). Possible scenarios for this unit include:
Review
2D.P6, 2D.M5
2D.D4, (1D.6)
162
Developing and
Testing a
Spreadsheet
Solution
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5
2C.M4, (1C.5)
2C.D3
Evaluation.
Test plan.
A spreadsheet solution to a proposed

brief
o a basic plan to test the

spreadsheet.
o potential output in charts and

graphs
o proposed functions, formula and

calculations, named ranges
You should make specific recommendations for

further improvement of the solution.
Before you present your manager with

your ideas for a spreadsheet solution, and
demonstrate how it can be used, you must
review your solution and design. The review
should consider strengths and areas for
improvement and justify changes you have
made to your original design.
You should test their spreadsheet for

functionality, purpose and usability, gathering
user feedback from the people who try the
spreadsheet. You should record any
changes made.
You should complete a test plan that includes

testing how well the spreadsheet solution is
used by people in the administration team.
Now you will create a spreadsheet solution to

manage the information about season ticket
holders.
Your design documents should consider the

formatting of inputs to the spreadsheet, what
processes (calculations) are required, and the
output presentation of the result/outcome
displayed as a chart, graph or table.
o worksheet layout
o purpose
o user needs
Design documents, including:
You have been asked to produce a spreadsheet

to manage the season ticket holder information.
Designing a
Spreadsheet
Solution
2B.P2, 2B.M2
2B.P3, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
You will produce design documents for a
spreadsheet solution to meet your managers
needs.
Assessment evidence
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
UNIT 10: DATABASE DEVELOPMENT
Unit 10:
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Do you use the internet to search for information, such as music tracks, items in
an online shop or train times? If so, the chances are that you are using a database
without realising it! Many IT systems involve the use of databases and it is important
to understand how they work.
Databases are designed to hold data in a digital form, for example, a record for each
computer game in a shop. Database tools can be used to ensure the data is valid and
accurate. They also allow information to be restricted to certain individuals and to be
analysed and presented in reports.
Job roles include database administrators who oversee the performance, integrity and
security of a system and database managers who are responsible for the way a company
manages, organises and stores its information.
In this unit you will investigate the features and uses of databases by exploring what
they are and what you can do with them. You will be able to apply some of your findings
to your own database solution.
You will also learn how to use database software to design, develop and test relational
databases for a brief. Once completed, you will review your database, having obtained
In particular this unit develops skills from Unit 2: Technology Systems and the
following optional specialist units: Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development and Unit 12:
Software Development.
Learning aims
A understand the uses of and tools/techniques used in databases
B design a relational database
C develop and test a relational database
D review the finished relational database.
163

Learning aim A: Understand the uses of and tools/techniques used in
databases
Why are databases used?
The purpose of database software is to store, manage and extract a large amount of
organised information for one or more users.
Know why organisations use databases to:
improve productivity
make decisions
present information
interpret data
perform calculations
manage large datasets.
Examples of uses of a database:
health (data doctors, patients, appointments)
employment (data name, payroll, department)
agencies (data client, services, reservations)
sale of goods (data orders, goods, invoices)
libraries (data books, loans, members)
police (data offenders, crime, officers).
Tools and techniques used in a database
Tools and techniques include, e.g.:
table structures
field characteristics
validation rules
indexing
records
relationships
forms
sorts
queries.
(As listed in learning aim C.)
continued
164

Using databases to improve working practices
Improving productivity and accuracy in a database, e.g.:
creating and presenting financial reports
record keeping
backing up data
collaborative working
searching and planning information.
Databases and relationships
Types of databases, e.g.:
local
online (web)
flat file (contains a single table of information)
relational (uses common identifiers found within a data set consisting of two or more
related tables).
Types of relationships, e.g.:
one-to-one is a relationship between one record in the first table that corresponds to
exactly one record in the related table
one-to-many is a relationship where each record in the first table may have many
linked records in the related table, but will still have only one corresponding record in
the first table
many-to-many is a relationship where each record in the first table may have linked
records in the related table and vice versa.
Learning aim B: Design a relational database
Designing a database
Designs should be based around the intended purpose and user requirements as
defined in a brief to solve a problem.
Design documentation, including:
hardware, software and other resources required
entity Relationship Diagram (ERD), including entities, attributes and relationships
validation and verification procedures
input and output screens/forms and reports
constraints (e.g. hardware and software availability)
test plan with test data to test functionality
a brief outline of alternative design ideas.
165

Learning aim C: Develop and test a relational database
Software tools and techniques to develop a relational database
Create and edit:
single and multiple table structures with appropriate field characteristics, including
o field names
o field data types, e.g. alphabetic (text and memo), numeric (number, currency,
and date/time), alphanumeric (text and memo), logical (yes/no and true/false),
web (hyperlink), lookup wizards
o field sizes (e.g. byte, integer, long integer, single, double and decimal)
o field formats (e.g. fixed and decimal places)
o default values
validation rules and text, which applies to a range, format and length for different
data types including input masks
indexing (e.g. primary key, foreign key)
create new records (e.g. populate tables with data manually or import a data set
from an external source (text file or spreadsheet))
edit and delete existing records of data
create, edit and delete relationships
use wizards.
Create and edit forms, including:
simple forms (e.g. data-entry and main menu forms with limited functionality)
customised forms, which suit users and purpose, e.g. a data-entry form that
facilitates accurate data entry, has an appropriate user interface with programmable
buttons that run events (navigation, add new record, delete record, print record)
and main menu forms allowing users to access sub-forms (e.g. data-entry forms),
run queries and view reports
sub-forms
forms should
o allow navigation between sub-forms
o enable the entry of data into single and multiple tables
o have appropriate entry-form field lengths
o provide clear labelling of entry-form fields
o provide instruction fields where necessary
o include validation checks on field entries as appropriate
o delete existing forms.
continued
166

Use reports:
create and edit reports to present meaningful information for a purpose and specific
users, using features (e.g. titles, page layout, colours, field selection, date/time,
grouping, introductions and images)
delete existing reports.
Use sorts:
sort records using a single field (alpha or numeric, ascending and descending)
sort records using multiple fields.
Use queries:
queries with single criteria on one or two fields using relational operators
queries with multiple criteria using at least two tables, making use of logical
operators (e.g. AND, OR, NOT) and wildcards.
Automation, security and usability e.g.:
automated tasks using macros
security to protect the database
provide onscreen user navigation and instructions.
Testing a database
The testing process:
Test the relational database for functionality, purpose and usability
Use feedback from others, for example, on the databases functionality, its usability,
and its performance
Consider possible improvements and/or refinements to the relational database, for
example, additional tables, additional queries, forms, reports, automation (macros)
and security
Provide onscreen user navigation and instructions.
Learning aim D: Review the finished relational database
Reviewing a database
Review the finished relational database for:
the user requirements and user experience (e.g. usability and reliability)
fitness for purpose
any constraints (e.g. hardware and software availability)
167
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Identify the uses of

databases and how the
tools/techniques are
used in two different
databases.
2A.P1 Explain the uses of

databases and how the
used in two different
databases.
Produce a design for a

database with guidance,
including a single table
database structure with
a data entry form.
1B.3
168

the database.
1B.2
a test plan.
a database structure
2B.P3 Produce a design for

a relational database,
including:

for the database.
Learning aim B: Design a relational database
1A.1

the relational database
will fulfil the stated
purpose and user
requirements, and any
constraints in the design.

databases.
Level 2 Distinction
test data.
a detailed database
structure
alternative designs

design for a relational
database, including:
2A.M1 Review how the

used in two databases
to improve productivity,
accuracy and usability.
Learning aim A: Understand the uses of and tools/techniques used in databases
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Test the functionality

of the database and
repair any faults with
guidance.*
sort records
a data-entry form.
2C.P5 Test the functionality

and purpose of the
relational database for
functionality, repairing
any faults.*
data-entry forms.
two tables
2C.P4 Develop a relational

database with a realistic
data set, which includes:
a single table structure
Develop a database with

a realistic data set with

database is suitable for
and purpose.
2D.P6 Explain how the final

database is suitable for
and purpose.

which the finished
database meets the
user requirements,
from others.

others and use it to
improve the database
and test any additional
functionality, repairing
any faults.*
onscreen navigation
and guidance
queries and output

data reports
customised dataentry forms
2C.M3 Develop the database

demonstrating
awareness of users
requirements and
accuracy. To include:
Level 2 Merit
1D.6
Learning aim D: Review the finished relational database
1C.5
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test a relational database
Level 1
169
2D.D4 Evaluate the finished

database against the
design and justify any
recommendations for
further improvements to
the database.
2C.D3 Refine the database

solution using automated
tools and techniques to
improve productivity,
accuracy and the
presentation of output
data, taking account of
user feedback.*
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resource required for this unit is database software that allows the
creation and use of relational database structures.
Learners will also need a brief to design and develop a database against.
A brief should include:
purpose
client and user requirements for the database
task(s) the database must perform
information the database must supply, in what form and to whom
data to be input into the database, how and from where
the processing that is required in the database
the level of security needed to access the database.
The tasks, data and processing in the brief must meet the following requirements
(as a minimum):
at least two tables with appropriate field attributes, including names, sizes
formats, data types, validation rules and text
define appropriate primary and foreign keys
a given data set containing at least 50 records
at least one one-to-many relationship between at least two tables
sort records using single and multiple fields
at least two data-entry forms, which enables entry of data into single and/or
multiple tables
a main menu form, which links to the data-entry sub-forms and includes options to
run queries and view reports
at least five queries, which searches for meaningful information using single and
multiple criteria in at least two tables, using relational and logical operators and
wildcards
at least three reports to present meaningful information for a purpose and
audience.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will investigate databases by describing the main uses of databases, as well
as the purpose of the tool/techniques they include.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the uses of databases and how the
tools/techniques are used in two given databases, e.g. an appointment system for a
doctors surgery that stores records of patients, appointments and medical history,
with the intention of using features such as reports to identify the numbers of
cancelled appointments in any given month. The two databases should be designed
for different purposes.
170
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the uses of databases and how
the tools/techniques are used for two databases, including tables, fields, records,
queries and reports.
For 2A.M1: learners should explain how the tools/techniques of the databases could
improve productivity, accuracy and usability, e.g. sending an automated mail shot to
every patient in the database using their address details, explaining important news
about the surgery.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the databases in more detail and consider the
strengths and weaknesses of the product. They should discuss at least one strength
and one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should now have an understanding of what databases are and should be
able to distinguish between different types of databases. They will be able to apply
what they find out during their investigation of databases in the development of their
own relational database.
Learners will design, develop and test a relational database.
Learners should be given a brief, which will allow them to design a relational
database for a given purpose. The brief should ideally be written with a client in
mind, including clear objectives of what they want the database to perform and
present. This will include a data set containing at least 50 records that learners
will be expected to import into the database.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the development of the database as
For 2B.P2: To produce a design for a relational database, learners must first be able
to understand and interpret the purpose and users requirements for the product,
relating this to design ideas for the product. They should be able to provide a
description of the relational database and what it is intended to be used for.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the user requirements and
purpose for the design of their database.
For 2B.P3: learners need to provide a database structure, including at least two
tables with appropriate field attributes (e.g. names, sizes, formats, data types), an
entity relationship diagram illustrating at least one, one-to-many relationship and a
data input form. Learners must also provide a test plan giving an outline of the range
of tests that they will perform when the relational database is developed.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have created with guidance, an outline
design for their relational database. Their outline design will contain a single table
database structure with appropriate field attributes and input/output screen for a
data entry form.
For 2B.M2: learners will need to consider alternative design ideas to suit audience
and purpose including:
different ways of presenting reports and forms.
A detailed database structure including what validation and verification procedures
would apply to the data. Learners will also need to provide an input and output
screen/form for a main menu with options to access at least two data-entry sub-forms,
run queries and view reports. All forms at this stage should be customised to meet
audience and purpose. Examples include applying appropriate logos, themes, titles and
user instructions. Learners must include some test data as part of the test plan, which
should reflect the user requirements.
an outline of at least five queries and three reports that will extract and present
meaningful information.
171
For 2B.D2: learners should justify their final design decisions, explaining how the
relational database will fulfil the stated purpose and user requirements. Learners
must also think about the constraints, e.g. software availability and whether or not
this will have an impact on developing the relational database. If it does, learners
should consider whether there are any alternatives for developing the same solution.
Learners should explain why alternative designs were rejected.
Learning aim C
Learners will have a design of what their intended database will do, how it will be
structured and how it will be tested. They should therefore be ready to apply their
practical skills and knowledge to develop and test a relational database.
For 2C.P4: learners should use appropriate software resources (identified in their
design) to develop their relational database. The relational database that they
design must demonstrate awareness of the purpose of the database and user
requirements.
As a minimum, learners should have developed a relational database that
demonstrates the following competencies (as defined in the brief):
consists of at least two tables with appropriate field attributes including names,
sizes formats, data types, validation rules and text
has defined primary and foreign key(s)
has tables populated with a combined data set containing at least 50 records
has at least one example of a one-to-many relationship
sorts records using single and multiple fields alphabetically or numerically in
ascending or descending order
includes at least two data-entry forms.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have developed a database with
assistance from the teacher, which includes a single table with appropriate field
attributes and an input form for data entry.
For 2C.M3: learners will develop the database, demonstrating an awareness of the
intended user requirements and accuracy by:
creating reports to present meaningful information, using features (e.g. titles,
page layouts, colours, field selection, date/time, grouping, introductions and
images)
customising data-entry forms, to enable entry of data into single and multiple
tables. The fields should have appropriate entry-form field lengths, have clear
labelling of entry-form fields, provide instruction fields where necessary and
include validation checks on field entries where appropriate and facilitate
navigation
creating and editing a main menu form with options to access other forms,
queries and reports
searching with single and multiple criteria on one or two fields in at least two
tables, using relational and logical operators and wildcards
onscreen user navigation and guidance.
For 2C.P5: learners will be expected to follow their test plans (as defined in their
design) and test the functionality and purpose of their database.
172
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they develop their database.
Where this happens, learners will be expected to resolve these difficulties, and by
doing so will have made the necessary repairs to their database. It is important
that learners make appropriate comments on their designs and test plans about
any issues they discover and how they resolved them.
For level 1, as a minimum, Learners must show they have tested for the functionality
of their database. Learners will need guidance to test their database.
For 2C.M4: over and above the existing functionality testing, learners will also be
required to test the functionality of the additional features of the database, as
implemented for 2C.M3.
Learners will also complete usability testing with the help of at least one person who
can act as the client. The client should comment on the functionality and usability
of the relational database. Learners should record this feedback as part of the testing
process.
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the process of developing and testing a
database is an iterative process. When making refinements to their database,
learners should take into account their test results and feedback.
Learners should refine the database solution using automated tools and techniques to
improve productivity, accuracy and the presentation of output data. The database
should include:
error messages resulting from validation and verification checks to data
(including queries and reports) and the user interface (forms)
onscreen user guidance to assist users with the user interface, particularly with
instructions on how to navigate throughout the forms, data entry and data
management, queries and reports
automations (e.g. the ability to automate tasks using macros).
Learners will also be expected to make refinements to their databases by taking
account of their test results and feedback from the client.
database should have been considered as how best to refine the product.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should explain why their final database meets the user
requirements and purpose.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified how their database meets
the purpose and user requirements.
For 2D.M5: learners should build on the comments they made for the pass criteria,
and should refer back to the user requirements as defined in their design when doing
so. They should also seek feedback from another person about the final relational
database. An interview would be an ideal way of discussing the relational database
and recording the feedback. Learners should use this feedback to identify strengths
and potential improvements.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their design against the final database in terms
of overall user experience and user requirements in the original brief. They should
justify any changes that were made through the development of the database and
explain the rationale for the changes. Refinements could include exporting data,
using data to create mail shots, macros, complex queries, etc. They should also give
at least three recommendations for any further improvements, but do not need to
implement the enhancements.
173
How and Why are

Databases Used?
2A.P1, 2A.M1,
2A.D1, (1A.1)
174
Assignment
Criteria covered
A short report.
Assessment evidence
Write a short description of the use and features

of databases in two different organisations. How
does each database improve productivity?
You work for a local health authority and have

been asked to develop simple information
management systems for doctors surgeries to
use in the area. Before you design a database
solution, you want to prepare a demonstration to
show how databases are currently used in two
different ways by organisations.
Scenario
members will be able to use the database online to search for information and to generate reports.
an endangered animals charity needs a database of all the animals that it supports.
An idea for a scenario is:
Justify how your design meets the requirements

of the doctors surgery.
Customise your forms.
The design should include the structure,

validation, queries and reports that will extract
and present meaningful information and a test
plan with test data.
at least one main menu form that accesses at

least two data-entry sub-forms, including
options to view queries and reports.
at least two data-entry forms for new service

users and appointments
input and output screens
an entity relationship diagram
at least two tables
Your design should include:
Design a database to store service users details

and their appointments, with appropriate fields.
Database design documents
You begin your design of an information system

by designing a database for a doctors surgery
for a new appointment system. The surgery has
five doctors.
Designing a
Database for a
Doctors Surgery
2B.P2, 2B.M2
2B.P3, 2B.D2
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Justification.
Structure
Assessment evidence
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
175
176
You should now develop your pilot database and

test it out with some users.
Developing Your
Database
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5,
2C.M4, (1C. 5),
2C.D3
Feedback from users.
Updated versions of files
Witness statement and observation

records
Annotated design documents
Database
Assessment evidence
Improve your database.
Get the opinion of at least one other person on

your database in terms of how easy it is to use.
Test your database (including any validation

rules). Repair any features that do not work.
Populate your database with the given dataset.
Create appropriate reports that will extract and

present information, e.g. a report of missed
appointments in any given day, week or month.
Create appropriate queries that will search for

patient or appointment data, e.g. a service
users address or medical history.
Create one main menu form that will allow staff

to navigate between all forms (e.g. data-entry
sub-forms) and be able to run queries and view
reports.
Your database should be able to sort records

alphabetically or numerically, in ascending and
descending order. Create two data-entry forms
that are suitable for staff use, e.g. adding new
patients and new appointments.
Create the database structure and build a

relationship between the tables. Add appropriate
data validation.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Reviewing Your
Database
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4
What changes did you make to your designs?

Explain any changes made. How would you
improve your database to roll it out for other
surgeries?
Does your finished database meet the brief

given by the doctors surgery? How does it meet
the requirements of the brief? How is it suitable
for the users?
Give at least three strengths and one

improvement you could make to your database.
You now need to review your database solution

before you present it to your manager or roll it
out across surgeries in the local area.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Annotation of design and feedback
responses.
A report
Assessment evidence
177
178
UNIT 11: COMPUTER NETWORKS
Unit 11:
Computer Networks
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Computer networking is an important part of our daily business and personal lives
that most people take for granted. Without networks, many of the tools and systems
used by business and individuals would not function: we couldnt surf the worldwide
web, send and receive emails, or use a variety of devices such as a smartphone,
laptop or games console to communicate with friends and family online.
So, what is computer networking? In its simplest form, computer networking is a
collection of interconnected, wired or wireless, hardware devices and associated
software that allows computers to communicate and share resources with each other.
There are a number of job roles that involve working with computer networks.
These include:
network engineers who design, develop, test, operate and support computer
networks and services
network managers who ensure that the network capacity can meet an
organisations needs and that it is secure
IT support technicians who find and correct software and hardware problems for
computer users, including problems in computer networks.
In this unit, you will come to understand the features and uses of computer networks
by exploring what networks are, as well as the different types of network and how
they affect user experience. You will investigate issues such as reliability (frequency
of network failure and performance) and how quickly data are transferred across the
network under different conditions. You will be able to apply some of your findings to
your own computer network. You will also learn about the different hardware and
software devices needed for networking, and how these can be combined to make a
computer network. You will also put your knowledge and skills into practice by
designing, developing and testing your own computer network for a brief. Once
completed, you will review your network against the brief and obtain feedback
from the client, having obtained feedback from others, and evaluate possible
improvements.
In particular this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World, Unit 2:
Technology Systems and complements the skills in Unit 12: Software Development.
Learning aims
A understand the features and uses of computer networking
B design a computer network
C develop and test a computer network
D review the finished computer network.
179

Learning aim A: Understand the features and uses of computer networking
Computer networks
Computer networks are a collection of interconnected, wired or wireless, hardware
components and software that allow computer devices to communicate and share data
with each other.
Features of computer networks
Understand the different features of computer networks:
connection method (e.g. wired and wireless)
scope or scale (e.g. Local Area Network (LAN), Wide Area Network (WAN),
Metropolitan Area Network (MAN), Personal Area Network (PAN), Storage Area
Network (SAN))
architecture (e.g. peer-to-peer, client-server)
topology, including
o physical (e.g. star, bus, ring, mesh, tree and point-to-point)
o logical (e.g. Ethernet and token ring)
protocols and their function (e.g. Ethernet, Internet Protocol (IP), Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP))
security (with regard to files, folders, data, network access, resources)
utilities (e.g. virus protection, access control, backup, remote desktop)
services (e.g. login, user account management, file/folder permissions to an
individual user/group of users, security, software deployment)
users (e.g. can be used by individuals or groups of people arranged in different ways
for different uses).
Understand how data is transferred across the computer network, e.g. packet routing,
transmission modes (half duplex, duplex, serial and parallel) and transfer rates.
Uses of a computer network
Use of networks, e.g.:
communication (e.g. email, instant messaging, social networking, blogs, forums,
wikis, web conferencing)
sharing hardware resources (e.g. internet, printer, scanner, storage,
processing power)
exchanging information (e.g. files, data and other types of information)
multi-user environments (e.g. gaming, collaborative working)
storage (e.g. files, data centres)
applications (e.g. online databases, online spreadsheets, intranet, extranet).
continued
180

Consider how these features could affect productivity or the user experience, e.g.:
record keeping
increasing speed
sharing information securely
backing up
keeping individuals informed
collaborative working
playing computer games in a multi-player gaming environment.
181

Learning aim B: Design a computer network
Designing a network
Requirements of the brief, to include:
purpose
requirements/objectives/activities (refer to assessment guidance)
details of the users and their roles/function (including number of users)
size/geographical spread/location
costs (budget)
constraints.
Initial design ideas and alternative solutions to developing the intended computer
network. There will be more than one way to develop the same computer network
using different topologies, hardware components and network architectures.
Hardware components in the network
Features of hardware components:
their role/purpose
how they connect
how they communicate with other components in the intended computer network.
Hardware components, e.g.:
computer systems/workstations/servers
network adapters (wired/wireless)
router (wired/wireless)
hub
switch
network cabling (e.g. fibre optics, UTP, STP, coaxial; connectors)
wireless (e.g. infrared, Bluetooth, laser, narrow-band [single-frequency] radio).
Software components in the network
Features of software components:
their role/purpose
their relationship with other components in the intended computer network.
Software components, to include:
applications (e.g. internet browsers, firewalls, email, antivirus, network utilities
(remote management), office applications)
operating system with appropriate utilities capable of operating in a network
environment.
Constraints to consider:
costs (e.g. component cost for the intended computer network)
technical constraints (e.g. hardware and software availability).
continued
182

Design documentation
To include:
computer network set-up and configuration, e.g. IP addressing/subnet masks
(if appropriate), security, sharing files and folders, access permissions for users,
managing user accounts (add, remove and amend), and sharing hardware/software
resources, e.g. internet, printers, storage devices
network user rights (e.g. administration rights, access control rights, shared resource
rights)
network diagram (e.g. structure of the network, components, positioning of the
components, connection medium and IP addresses (if applicable))
test plan with test data to test functionality (e.g. testing the connectivity between
all devices on the network).
183

Learning aim C: Develop and test a computer network
Develop a computer network
Develop a peer-to-peer or client-server network (depending on hardware and software
resource availability) that meets the brief.
Gathering components
Network components to gather:
a minimum of two computer systems/workstations/clients
a server (if appropriate and resources available)
simulated software, such as Packet Tracer (if no hardware and software resources
are available)
network adapters (wired or wireless)
network cabling (if wired)
a hub/router/switch (if networking more than two computer
systems/workstations/clients)
a server operating system (if building a client-server network)
operating system (e.g. adding/removing/amending users, sharing files and folders,
setting access permissions to files and folders, installing applications, sharing
hardware resources, i.e. printer or any other network device)
utilities (e.g. remote desktop management, user rights, access control, firewall
configuration, anti-virus, scheduling).
Health and safety when developing a network
Health and safety issues, e.g. hardware, electrical connection risks and guidelines,
handling equipment.
Testing the network
Test the computer network for functionality/connectivity using command tools,
such as ipconfig and ping (reliability, performance, e.g. time to transfer a file across
the network)
Use the full range of utilities/services provided by the operating system to test
other aspects of the network (e.g. shared resources, user accounts, access control,
file/folder permissions)
Feedback from client (e.g. functionality, usability, requirements, performance)
Potential improvements to the computer network (e.g. performance, capacity,
accessibility, portability, reliability, security).
Learning aim D: Review the finished computer network
Review the finished computer network against:
user requirements
purpose
user experience (e.g. reliability, performance)
constraints (e.g. hardware and software availability).
184
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Identify the uses and

features of a different
computer network.
2A.P1 Explain the uses and

computer network.

computer network, with
1B.3
a test plan.
a network diagram
a list of hardware and

software components,
their role, and how
they connect and
communicate with
each other

a computer network
including:

and client requirements
for the network.
costs involved with

setting up the
computer network.
test data
an outline of how
the computer network
will be set up and
configured

design for a computer
network including:
2A.M1 Review how the uses and

computer network affect
the user experience.
an outline network
diagram.
the number of network

users
a list of hardware and

software components

client requirements for
the network.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design a computer network
1A.1
Learning aim A: Understand the features and uses of computer networking
Level 1
Assessment criteria
185

the computer network
will fulfil the stated
purpose and client
requirements, describing
the impact of any
constraints on the
design.

network.
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
Test the computer

network for connectivity,
with guidance.
network users sharing

one folder and three
files.
at least two network

users
Develop a computer
network, with guidance,
that has:
2C.P5 Test the computer

network for functionality,
connectivity against
original requirements,
and repair any faults
as necessary.
users sharing at least

five folders and at
least seven files.
at least three network

users
2C.P4 Develop a computer

network that has:
For the final computer

network, identify how
it is suitable for the
intended purpose and
original requirements.
186

which the final computer
network meets the
original requirements
while considering
feedback.
2C.M4 Test the computer

network and gather
feedback, and use it to
improve the computer
network on user
experience for
functionality and
connectivity.
2C.M3 Develop a complex

computer network with
at least one additional
shared hardware device
and network utility
software resource,
demonstrating
awareness of the original
requirements.
Level 2 Merit
2D.D4 Evaluate the initial

designs against the final
computer network and
justify any changes that
were made, making
recommendations for
further improvements to
the computer network.
2C.D3 Refine the computer

network in order to
improve performance
and reliability, taking
account of feedback.
Level 2 Distinction
2D.P6 For the final computer

network, explain how the
final computer network is
and purpose.
1D.6
Learning aim D: Review the finished computer network
1C.5
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test a computer network
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resource required for this unit is access to networking hardware
components and software. Learners can also use network simulators, such as Packet
Tracer to develop their understanding of concepts.
Hardware and software resources will be needed for the practical aspects of the unit.
As a minimum, each learner will need access to two PCs with network adapters,
cabling (if wired), wireless router (if wireless) and appropriate software, and simple
manuals for the setting up and testing of the computer network. If there are more
than two PCs, a hub or router will be required to connect them together.
The practical activities, although limited, should take place in a workshop with
appropriate tools, and take account of health and safety requirements. Access
to technical support is valuable, unless the teacher is very experienced.
To illustrate concepts and aid demonstrations, a wide range of current hardware
components should be available for learners to study and use.
Learners will require an appropriate brief in order to design the network, and access
to the client (potentially the teacher) in order to get feedback about the network.
What they observe and find out during the investigation in learning aim A can be
applied in the development of their own computer network.
For this unit, learners will need good background materials in the form of handouts,
and diagrams of network structures and network operations.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will investigate computer networks, describing the main uses and features
of a network.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the uses and features of a given computer
network. For example, what features a computer network requires, allowing people
to play computer games simultaneously in a multi-player gaming environment.
The two computer networks should be designed for different purposes.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identify uses and features of
computer networks. For a given network, they are likely to have identified only the
main features and the main uses of the network, without any description which
relates the two together.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how the uses and features of a given computer
network could affect the user experience, e.g. reliability (frequency of network
failure) and performance (how quickly data is transferred across the network under
different conditions). The learner should explain how different features in the network
affect the user experience, e.g. speed, connectivity, reliability.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at one computer network in more detail and discuss
187
Learning aim B
Learners should now have an understanding of what computer networks are used
for, and their features. Learners will design, develop and test their own computer
network. They have a choice of designing either a peer-to-peer or client-server
network, depending on hardware and software resource availability.
Learners should be given a brief, which will allow them to design a computer
network. The brief should ideally be written with a client in mind with clearly stated
resource requirements and objectives.
The brief must include the following requirements (as a minimum):
create at least three network users, one of whom must be a network administrator
with full control over the computer network
create at least five shared folders and seven shared files, with different access
permissions for different users
configure network users, e.g. place in groups, set login restrictions,
disable accounts
create at least one shared hardware network resource, e.g. printer, scanner,
external storage device
configure network users, e.g. add more users, remove existing users, change
passwords(s), change access rights, set login restrictions, disable user accounts
setup use of network utilities, e.g. remote desktop, instant messaging,
antivirus, firewall.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the development of the network as
For 2B.P2: in order to produce a design for a computer network, learners must first
be able to understand and interpret the requirements from the brief for the product.
They should be able to provide a description of the clients requirements for the
computer network, and its intended use.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners will identify the client requirements for the
network and its intended purpose.
For 2B.P3: learners will design the network. This should include a description of
users needs, and their role when using the computer network. For example, one or
more users may be given administrator responsibilities for maintaining the computer
network. Learners need to provide a structure for their computer network, which
must include a list of hardware components and software resources, the names
and roles of the people that will be using the network, the role of the networking
components and how they connect or communicate with each other. They should also
provide a network diagram showing the structure of the network, network devices
and other equipment, positioning of network devices and equipment, connection
medium and IP address (if applicable).
Learners must also provide a test plan, giving an outline of the range of tests that
they will perform when the network is developed.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have created, with guidance, an outline
design for their computer network. An outline design would contain a list of hardware
and software components, the number of users, and an outline network diagram
illustrating the network devices and their connections.
188
For 2B.M2: learners should include some alternative solutions within their design
documentation. For example, variations of how the same network can be developed,
either by changing the physical or logical topologies or changing the network
components. They must have also considered how their computer network will be
set up and configured; for example, setting up IP addresses and subnet masks,
and setting up different access permissions for individual or groups of network users.
All network users will be expected to have a username and password to access the
computer network. Learners must have also considered the costs involved with
setting up a network, in terms of the hardware components and software resources.
Learners must include some test data as part of the test plan, which should reflect
the client requirements.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify their design decisions, including their final choice
of network design and why they chose one design compared to another. Learners
should be able to reference that to the given purpose and client requirements.
Learners must also think about constraints, e.g. hardware and software availability,
and whether or not this will have an impact on developing the computer network. If it
does, are there any alternatives for developing the same solution? Learners should
explain why alternative designs were rejected.
Learning aim C
Learners will have a design of what their intended computer network will do,
what it will consist of, where it will be located, how it will be connected, set up and
configured, and how it will be tested. They should therefore be ready to apply their
practical skills and knowledge to develop and test a computer network.
For 2C.P4: learners should use appropriate hardware components and software
resources (identified in their design) to develop their computer network. The
computer network that they build must demonstrate awareness of the purpose
of the network and the client requirements.
As a minimum, learners should have developed a computer network that has
(as defined in the brief):
at least three network users, one of whom is a network administrator
users sharing of at least five folders and seven files, which have different access
permissions for the three network users.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have developed a computer network with
assistance from the teacher, which shows that they have been able to set up at least
two network users, and create and share one folder and three files (with no access
permissions).
For 2C.M3: as a minimum, learners will develop a more complex computer network,
with the addition of at least one additional hardware device and software resource.
These could include a printer, scanner, external storage device, internet or email.
They will share and configure the hardware device(s) and utilities on the network.
design) and test the functionality and connectivity of their computer network, in
terms of checking the physical connections and electronic communication between
devices. They should also test that the network meets their client requirements.
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they develop their computer
network. Where this happens, learners will be expected to resolve these difficulties,
and by doing so will have made the necessary repairs to their computer network.
It is important that learners make appropriate comments in their designs and test
plans about any issues they discover, and how they have resolved them. Where
appropriate to do so, photographs of problems and solutions or witness statements
and observation records can be used as evidence of this process.
189
Learners must adhere to all health and safety guidelines when undertaking practical
activities with electronic equipment.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners must show that they have tested connectivity
between at least two network devices, e.g. computer systems in the network, with
guidance.
For 2C.M4: learners will be required to test the functionality of the additional
hardware device(s) and software resource(s) over and above the existing
functionality testing.
Learners will also complete user-experience testing with the help of at least
one person who can act as the client. The client should be commenting on the
functionality, performance and reliability of the computer network. Learners should
record this feedback as part of the testing process.
networks is an iterative process. When making refinements to their network, learners
should take into account their test results and feedback.
Learners should refine their network to improve the reliability and performance.
If it is not possible for learners to apply their improvements (for example, due to
software or hardware constraints), learners should explain what they would do if they
had the opportunity focusing on reliability and performance. Learners will also be
expected to the make refinements following their test results and the feedback from
the client.
Refinements could include configuring the computer network, such as configuring
the users, e.g. adding more users, removing existing users, changing access rights,
setting login permissions, disabling accounts, or demonstrating a range of networking
utilities, such as remote desktop.
All of the ideas from testing, feedback and reviewing the computer network should
have been considered as learners go through the refinement process.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should explain why their network is suitable for the intended
purpose and the original requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified how their network is
suitable for the purpose and the original requirements.
For 2D.M5: learners should build on the explanations for the Pass criteria, and
review how well the client requirements and purpose have been met. They should
also seek feedback from the client about the final network. An interview would be
an ideal way of discussing the computer network and recording the feedback.
Learners should use this feedback to identify strengths and potential improvements
for their network.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate the initial designs/solutions against the final
computer network in terms of costs, overall user experience, and purpose and client
requirements in the original brief. They should justify any changes that were made
and explain the rationale for those changes. They should also give recommendations
for at least three improvements, but do not need to implement the enhancements.
190
Suggested assignment scenario

The information below is guidance only, and centres should refer to the suggested
assessment outline table for more information.
Suggested scenario
You work for a network development company called Dayce Networking Solutions.
A new client wants your company to design and develop a small computer network
for their office in a nearby town. There is currently a team of eight people working in
the office. These people are all using stand-alone computer systems, one of which is
connected to a laser printer.
The client has given the following requirements.
All team members must be able to access and use the computer network.
The computer network must be configured to allow adding more users, changing
access rights, and setting login restrictions.
All team members must have their own individual folder on the computer network
with full access rights. Everyone should be able to access each others folders with
different access rights. This should be configured for at least six people.
Everyone will be working with a minimum of seven files on the network.
All computers in the network must be able to connect to the laser printer.
The computer network should make use of remote desktop to allow users to take
control of other computers in the network.
191
Investigation
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
192
Assignment
Criteria covered
Interview.
Report.
Presentation.
Web page.
Assessment evidence
Prepare a presentation or a report for the

client.
You need to consider strengths and weaknesses

of two existing networks.
The client also wants to know how these

features and uses could improve the user
experience of the network.
For the scenario, the client wants to know a

little more about what a computer network is,
its features and potential uses.
Scenario
You have been given a brief by your company,

Dayce Networking Solutions.
Designing a
Computer Network
2B.P2, 2B.M2,
2B.P3, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
a test plan.
a list of hardware constraints and software

availability
a network diagram
details of how the computer network will be

configured
the names of all people that will become users

of the computer network, and their role in the
network
a list of components, with an explanation

about their role, and how they will
connect/communicate with each other on the
computer network
a description of the computer network,

and what it will be used for
Prepare design documentation to include:
Your task is to design a network solution to

fulfil your client requirements.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Report.
Web page.
Assessment evidence
193
194
Review the Finished

Computer Network
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4, (1D.6)
Evaluate the computer network, justifying why it

meets the brief, suggest improvements and
consider any constraints.
Refine your computer network, taking on board

feedback from your client and test results.
Meet with your client to discuss your progress

and to gather some feedback about your
computer network.
Make any necessary improvements to the

computer network as a result of troubleshooting
the computer network.
Test and document the computer network.
use network utilities, e.g. remote desktop,

instant messaging, antivirus, firewall.
configuring network users, e.g. adding more

users, removing existing users, changing a
password, changing access rights, setting
login restrictions, disabling accounts
sharing at least one hardware/software

network resource, e.g. printer, scanner,
external storage device, internet, email
sharing at least five folders and seven files,

which have different access permissions for
different users
Report.
Observation records.
You must include the following:

addition of at least three network users, one
of whom must be a network administrator
who has full control over the computer
network
Witness statements.
Develop a computer network for your client.
Developing a
Computer Network
2C.P4, 2C.M3
(1C.4), 2C.P5
2C.M4, (1C.5)
2C.D3
Assessment evidence
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
UNIT 12: SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
Unit 12:
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
We live in an age of computer devices, which organisations and individuals have
come to rely on. Computer devices are everywhere and advances in these take place
daily. It is essential for organisations and IT professionals to develop and maintain
software programs that bring to life the technology we all rely on.
Being able to create software programs could give you a brilliant opportunity for a
varied, interesting, challenging and prosperous career that few other vocational
sectors can match. Software developers or engineers develop, test and maintain
computer programs to solve problems and/or improve productivity. To create
successful programs, you have to develop good problem-solving and creativethinking skills. In addition, businesses are likely to employ teams of people to
develop software programs, including system analysts who examine IT systems
and business processes.
In this unit, you will learn the rules of a programming language and how to write
code to develop a successful program. You will be able to apply some of your findings
to your own software solutions.
In addition, you will learn what factors affect the quality of the program and how
to produce good quality programs. You will design and develop your own software
program to fulfil a brief. You will test your programs for functionality and purpose,
and identify and repair faults. You will review your finished program, having obtained
This unit is not platform dependent and a range of program-development
environments can be used.
In particular this unit develops skills from Unit 2: Technology Systems and it
complements the delivery of Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development.
Learning aims
A understand the characteristics and uses of a software program
B design a software program
C develop and test a software program
D review the finished software program.
195

Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics and uses of a software
program
Why is software used?
Software programs instruct a computers central processing unit (CPU) to automatically
carry out a set of instructions used to solve a problem and/or improve productivity.
Know why we develop software programs and their uses, e.g.:
gaming and entertainment (e.g. computer games, CGI in movies, virtual worlds,
social networking)
increasing productivity (e.g. automating processes in manufacturing, stock control
systems)
information storage and management (e.g. stock control systems, booking systems)
completing repetitive tasks (e.g. control robotic arms in manufacturing) and
dangerous tasks (e.g. defusing explosive devices, nuclear plants)
solving complex problems (e.g. weather forecasting).
Characteristics of software programs:
programming languages
constructs and techniques.
Programming languages
Types of programming language, including procedural languages like Pascal, C and
Cobol, and event-driven languages such as VB, VB.NET, VBA, Visual C++.
Programming languages contain a range of constructs and techniques, including:
command words
subroutines
basic string handling
basic file handling
data structures
event handling.
Understand:
the reasons for compiling programs
there are a variety of program design methods
how flowcharts can be used to represent the processes within programs.
continued
196

Quality of software programs
Know that software design and techniques affect the quality of the program developed:
efficiency/performance, e.g. the amount of system resources a program consumes
(processor time, memory space, accessing storage media)
maintainability, e.g. the ease with which a program can be modified by its present or
future developers in order to carry out corrective, perfective or adaptive alterations
to the code
portability, e.g. the range of computer hardware and operating system platforms on
which the source code of a program can be run/compiled/interpreted
reliability, e.g. the accuracy of its outputs
robustness, e.g. the quality of the coding that ensures the extreme data can be
processed without causing the program to crash
usability, e.g. the ease with which an end user can use the program for its intended
purpose or, in some cases, even unanticipated purposes.
197

Learning aim B: Design a software program
Software development life cycle
Software development life cycle, which includes:
assess requirements
design specification, e.g.
o scope
o inputs
o outputs
o processing
o user interface
o constraints (e.g. programming language and timescales for development)
develop code
test
maintain.
Designing software
Designs include:
intended purpose and user requirements (as defined in a brief)
a problem definition statement
a proposed solution using design tools, e.g.
o a description of the main program tasks input and output format (such as to add
two numbers together and display a result)
o screen layouts and navigation, including prototypes (e.g. initial splash screen or
main activity screen)
o algorithms with a description of the method of solution (such as, flowcharts,
pseudocode and events)
o data structures
o data storage
o control structures
o data validation
o error handling and reporting
a brief outline of alternative solutions for the intended software program
(e.g. for screen layout and navigation)
a list of any pre-defined programs and/or code snippets and their sources
test plan with test data (e.g. testing the inputs and expected outputs and compilation
of the code)
constraints (e.g. device capabilities including connectivity, memory storage or
programming language).
198

Learning aim C: Develop and test a software program
Developing software
Develop software:
Understand a development environment to produce code
Develop and refine the software program using suitable programming language
constructs and techniques
Use program constructs and techniques.
Constructs and techniques
Program constructs, e.g.:
comments
constants (variables with a constant value that cannot change)
operators (arithmetic [+, , *, /, %] and logical [<, <=, >, >=, AND, OR, true,
false])
reserved words (which have special meaning within the programming language and
are used to write instructions in a program, e.g. in Visual Basic Get and Repeat are
reserved words)
input and output commands
local variables (exist only inside the subroutine/function where they are declared
and used)
global variables (exist throughout the entire program and in subroutines/functions)
assignment
sequence
counter controlled loops
conditional loops
iteration (while do, repeat until, for next)
sequential statements, selections (if then else)
recursion
subroutines/functions/procedures.
Data types, e.g.:
character
string (text)
integer and real (numbers)
Boolean.
Use basic string-handling commands to examine individual characters and substrings.
continued
199

Basic file-handling operations, e.g.:
open
read
write
close.
Use data structures:
user-defined data types and record structures
arrays.
Event handling:
forms
assigning properties to screen components, e.g. buttons, boxes, data validation
and drop-down lists
actions
imported structures.
Annotate the code to demonstrate understanding and to allow effective
repair/debugging of the program and for maintainability.
Compile the program into a suitable format to create an executable program.
Testing and refining the software
Test the program solution:
for functionality against the test plan with the test data
by reviewing the quality of the program in terms of reliability, usability,
efficiency/performance, maintainability and portability
gather feedback from others on the quality (reliability, usability,
efficiency/performance, maintainability, portability) of the solution.
Document any changes to the design, including changes to the source table for
pre-defined assets.
Improvements and/or refinements to the software program.
200

Learning aim D: Review the finished software program
Reviewing software
Review the finished software program for:
user requirements
fitness for purpose
user experience (e.g. ease of navigation)
constraints (e.g. programming language, time, device capabilities (memory,
connectivity)
quality of the program (e.g. reliability, usability, efficiency/performance,
maintainability, portability)
201
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Identify the purpose of

two simple programs and
their characteristics,
including tools and
techniques used.
202
Produce, with guidance,

a design for a program,
including:
1B.3
an outline of the
proposed solution.
a problem definition
statement

the software program.
1B.2
a test plan.
a list of any
pre-defined
functions/subroutines
a proposed solution
a problem definition
statement

program, including:

for the software
program.
test data.
a detailed proposed
solution using a range
of design tools

design for a program,
including:
2A.M1 Comment on the quality

of one of the given
simple programs,
suggesting any
improvements and
provide a flowchart to
show the processing.
any design
constraints.
how they will fulfil the

stated purpose and
user requirements
2B.D2 Justify the design


software program.
Level 2 Distinction
2A.P1 Explain the purpose of

two simple programs and
their characteristics,
including tools and
techniques used.
Learning aim B: Design a software program
1A.1
Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics and uses of a software program
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
commentary
throughout the code.*
(Please see guidance)

2C.P5 Test the program for
functionality using the
test plan and against the
and repair any faults.
constructs/techniques
constructs/techniques.*
With guidance, test the

program for functionality
and against the original
requirements and repair
any faults.
a user interface
(input and output)
2C.P4 Develop a program for

a given brief, which
includes:
a user interface
(input and output)
With guidance, develop a

program for a given brief,
that contains:
2C.M4 Test the program

using the test data,
gathering feedback from
others on the usability
and quality of the
program, and use it to
improve the software
program. Repair any
faults.

program that meets the
given brief.*
Level 2 Merit
1C.5
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test a software program
Level 1
2C.D3 Refine the software

program, taking
account of the quality
of the code and user
feedback.*
Level 2 Distinction
203
Level 2 Pass
For the software

program, identify how
the final program is
suitable for purpose
and the original
requirements.
204

which the software
program meets the
original requirements,
from others and any
constraints.
Level 2 Merit

software programs
against the initial
designs and the
quality of the code,
and justify any
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction
2D.P6 For the software

program, explain how
the final software
program is suitable for
the original requirements
and purpose.
1D.6
Learning aim D: Review the finished software program
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
Centres should consider carefully which programming language(s) they are going to
use and whether the language will allow learners to meet all the assessment criteria
for this unit. Please note that at level 2 we do not expect learners to develop
programs in an object-oriented language.
Teachers may wish to introduce learners to the concepts of programming using an
application such as Scratch, available from http://scratch.mit.edu/download, or
BYOB, which allows users to build their own subroutines. BYOB is available from
http://byobberkeley.edu/.
Assessment guidance
Learners will investigate the characteristics of software programs. This includes:
why software is used
knowing that different programming languages exist and that they have different
functions of the constructs and techniques
understanding how the quality of the software programs are affected by the design
choice of techniques and constructs.
Learning aim A
Learners will be given two sections of code or programs to investigate. The given
programs should be appropriate for the level of the learner, including a good range
of program constructs and techniques given in learning aim C.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the purpose of the code for each of the two given
programs, e.g. to carry out calculations, and explain the characteristics, including
constructs and techniques being used within the program, e.g. variables and
functions. The two software programs should be designed for different purposes.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should be able to identify the purpose of the
code and identify the constructs and techniques, e.g. variables and functions.
Teachers may wish to guide learners by including clear annotations on the code.
For 2A.M1: learners should review the quality (e.g. efficiency/performance,
maintainability and usability) of the program. Learners should provide specific
suggestions for improving the quality of this program. Learners should also include
a flowchart showing how the program functions.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at one software program in more detail and discuss
205
Learning aim B
Learners should have access to a suitable assessment brief, which contains the user
requirements of the program, including:
the purpose of the software program
the task(s) the software must perform
what the required user inputs and outputs are
an outline of any processing/functions required.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence from the development of the software as
program for their designs.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the user requirements and the
purpose of the program for their designs.
For 2B.P3: for a given problem outlined in a brief, learners should outline their
proposed solution. The design documentation should include:
a proposed solution using basic design tools a description of the main program
tasks, (e.g. data input and output format), screen layouts and navigation, simple
data structures and algorithms or descriptions of the method of solution
a list of any pre-defined programs and/or subroutines documenting the source
a test plan (to test for the logic and functionality).
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose and user
requirements for the program. The outline of a proposed solution will contain:
a description of the main program tasks input and output (e.g. to add two
numbers together and display a result)
screen layouts (input and output) templates or design sheets can be used to help
learners with their design.
produce:
a detailed proposed solution using a range of suitable tools (in addition to those
used at pass level) such as algorithms, e.g. flowcharts, data structures, data
storage, control structures, data validation and error handling and reporting
a brief outline of any alternative solutions for the intended software program
test data.
For 2B.D2: learners are expected to be able to justify their design decisions and how
the chosen design fulfils the stated purpose and user requirements for the given
brief. They should consider the suitability for the end user and the quality and
thoroughness of their design work. Learners need to consider their design in light
of any constraints arising from the programming. For example, language used, and
the device capabilities (e.g. memory) in terms of the quality of the user interface,
manipulation and storage of data, and ease of use. Learners should explain why
alternative designs were rejected.
206
Learning aim C
Learners will develop and test their program for a given brief.
For 2C.P4: learners should develop their solution to the given brief by implementing
their design. Some learners will find that their designs do not allow them to
implement a solution. In this case, learners should amend their program but should
not revisit the design work at this stage. Learners should ensure that they are
developing solutions using some constructs/techniques from the level 2 content in
learning aim C. These include conditional-controlled loops, Boolean data types and
functions. The program should also include commentary built into the program and
have a user interface with both input and output facilities.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should use their designs and their understanding
of the level 1 constructs/techniques to create simple programs to solve the given
problem. Learners at this level may experience difficulties in typing code correctly
and will need support with these activities.
For 2C.M3: at this level, learners will produce a functional program that satisfies the
brief. Learners are likely to need to adapt their designs to create a fully functioning
software solution.
For 2C.P5: learners should compile/run (depending on the programming language
being used) and test their program using their test plan. During the testing process
they should keep evidence of any changes made to the code, and repair any faults.
Learners should test that their program meets the original requirements from the
brief.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should compile/run their program and test the
programs main functions to ensure that data can be input, processed and output.
Learners will need guidance in order to achieve this criteria.
For 2C.M4: learners should compile/run (depending on the programming language
being used) and test their program using the test data. They should correct any
errors found in the code and produce evidence to show any changes made to the
program. Learners should work with others to obtain feedback on the quality and
functionality of their program, and use this to improve the program.
software is an iterative process. When making refinements to their software, learners
should take into account their test results and user feedback.
Learners should refine the software program, taking account of user feedback and
the quality of the code, e.g. maintainability, portability, usability.
All of the ideas from the testing, feedback and reviewing the software program
should have been considered in when refining the product.
207
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should review their program in light of the results of their
testing and should explain how their program is fit for purpose and meets the original
requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their software meets the
original requirements and the purpose.
For 2D.M5: learners should consider the outcomes of their testing and should review
the extent to which the program solves the given problem. Learners should gather
feedback from others and consider changes they would like to make in the light of
this feedback.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their initial designs and the completed
program. They should identify any changes made from the design stage and justify
these changes in terms of the requirements and the features of the language used,
and any other constraints.
Learners should make at least three specific suggestions for improving the completed
program to ensure it is fully functional, well coded and fit for purpose.
208
Programming constructs and techniques for level 1 assessment

It is recognised that some learners may fail to achieve a full Pass at level 2, so
learners being assessed for the level 1 criteria for learning aims B and C are not
required to include all of the different programming constructs in their work for
assessment.
The constructs that learners working at level 1 should be familiar with and include
in their assessment evidence are shown below.
Use program constructs and techniques, e.g.:
program constructs, e.g.
o comments
o constants variables with a constant value that cannot change
o operators arithmetic ( +, )
o reserved words which have special meaning within the programming language and
are used to write instructions in a program, e.g. in VisualBasic Get and Repeat are
reserved words
o local variables only exist inside the subroutine/function where they are declared
and used
o global variables exist throughout the entire program and in subroutines/functions
o assignment
o sequence
o counter controlled loops
subroutines/functions/procedures
use a range of data types, e.g.
o character
o string (text)
use data structures
o user-defined data types and record structures
event handling
o forms
o assigning properties to screen components, e.g. buttons, boxes and
drop-down lists
o actions.
209
Reviewing Programs
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
210
Assignment
Criteria covered
Flow chart.
Report.
Draft replacement code.
Annotated code.
Assessment evidence
the processes within the program.
any improvements you would make to the

program
the quality of the code
For one of the programs, review:
purpose.
constructs/techniques used
characteristics of the code
Your manager has asked you to look at two

programs. For each program, comment on:
You are a programmer working for a software

development company.
Scenario
Your manager has asked you to design a

program that converts different currencies based
on a given exchange rate.
Design a Password
Program
2B.P2, 2B.M2
2B.P3, 2B.D2
(1B.2, 1B.3)
a test plan.
a list of any pre-defined programs and/or

subroutines and include the source
a description of the main program tasks, (e.g.

data input and output format), screen layouts
and navigation, simple data structures and
algorithms or descriptions of the method of
solution
a proposed solution
You will need to design a software program that

meets the user requirements and purpose, and
include in your design:
You should explain how your design meets the

user requirements when addressing the
problem.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Screens (input and output).
Data structures and data storage.
Report.
Data validation.
List of tools, functions and

subroutines.
211
Processing structures, e.g. flow charts

and pseudocode.
Assessment evidence
Review the Program
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4 (1D.6)
212
Develop the program, including commentary

within the code.
Develop and Test
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5,
2C.M4, (1C.5),
2C.D3
Annotated design.
User feedback.
Include strengths and points you could improve.

Justify where your design has changed during
improve the program further.
Evaluation report.
Annotated code.
Functional program.
User feedback.
Annotated design.
Annotated code.
Assessment evidence
How could the program be improved?
Review and refine your program in light of

feedback.
Get feedback on the program from one other

person, including how easy it is to use and the
quality of the code.
Test the program against the test plan, checking

the client requirements are still being met and
documenting any changes to the program.
Fix any faults in the program.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
UNIT 13: WEBSITE DEVELOPMENT
Unit 13:
Website Development
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Have you ever viewed a website and wondered how it was created? Many different
elements can be included in the website, such as text, graphics, animation, video and
programs (client-side computer scripts). Many websites also contain sophisticated
interactive features such as database search facilities, online purchasing and
messaging. To be successful, a website must be visually interesting, while remaining
easy to use.
With the internet being central to how most organisations and individuals
communicate and do business, the creation and maintenance of websites is an
important job role. There is a strong demand in the job market for web developers
with appropriate technical and creative skills. For instance, a web-developer is a
technical role involved with designing and developing websites, a content manager
is responsible for keeping a website up to date and a search engine optimisation
specialist encourages user traffic from internet search engines to specific websites.
In this unit, you will investigate the features and uses of websites by exploring what
they are and how their integrated components and applications interact with each
other.
You will also learn how to design, develop and test a website for a brief. Once this
is completed you will review your website, having obtained feedback from others.
In particular this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World and Unit 2:
Technology Systems. It also develops the skills from the following units: Unit 4:
Creating Digital Animation, Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio, Unit 6: Creating Digital
Graphics, and Unit 7: Creating Digital Video. Unit 12: Software Development could
also complement the content of this unit.
Learning aims
A understand the uses and features of websites
B design a website
C develop and test a website
D review the finished website.
213

Learning aim A: Understand the uses and features of websites
Why are websites used?
The purpose of a website is to present information to an audience by using a collection
of related web pages, traditionally hosted on a web server. This information may
include text, graphics, video or other digital assets.
Typical uses of websites, including:
presenting information (e.g. advertising, news)
storing information (e.g. archiving, cloud)
browsing and searching for information (e.g. real-time information)
improving productivity (e.g. email, collaborative working)
making decisions (e.g. financial, managerial)
communicating with people (e.g. social networking, video conferencing)
media sharing (e.g. listen to live radio, watch films)
e-commerce (e.g. shopping, banking)
education (e.g. libraries, online learning, assessments)
downloading information (e.g. data, media).
Features of websites:
hyperlinks
action buttons
hot spots
templates
email links
registration and logins
forms (user input and feedback)
accessibility, e.g. text to speech.
e-commerce facilities
online forums
aesthetics, e.g. colours, layout, graphics/video/animation, audio, text, styles
(use of style sheets).
continued
214

Types of websites:
static
dynamic.
Static websites are a collection of web pages primarily coded in HyperText Markup
Language (HTML). These types of websites present static information to their audience,
e.g. a brochure.
A dynamic website is a collection of web pages that often changes or customises itself
frequently and automatically.
How can user experience of websites be improved?
Different features of websites can improve the user experience for an individual,
business or organisation, e.g.:
forms that allow customers to leave feedback
dynamic interactions when socialising online
applying style sheets to keep the same look and feel for a website
making websites interactive by embedding digital assets.
215

Learning aim B: Design a website
Designing a website
Designs include:
intended purpose and user requirements as defined in a brief
documented design ideas/prototypes, including:
o original and/or ready-made digital assets (e.g. digital animation, digital graphic,
digital audio, digital video or any combined assets). Sources for ready-made assets
must be documented and referenced.
o storyboard, containing a number of panels, showing the intended content and
structure of the website
o home page and folder structure
o site map, to illustrate how web pages are interlinked
o styles, templates and formats (e.g. colours, font size, font type, text and image
alignment, page layouts)
constraints, e.g. hardware and software availability, accessibility, browser
compatibility, file and file formats, client-side functionality, and performance
(bandwidth, processor, memory), availability of web plug-ins, e.g. ActiveX, Flash
test plan, to test functionality
a brief outline of alternative design ideas.
216

Learning aim C: Develop and test a website
Develop and test a website
Prepare assets and create a website:
Prepare (gather or create) suitable assets e.g. graphics, audio, video, other content
such as text and external links
Use appropriate software tools/techniques
create and edit web pages including:
o text
o tables
o forms (e.g. text field, text area, buttons, radio buttons, check boxes)
o frames
o navigation (e.g. menus, hyperlinks (internal and external), anchors)
o interactive components (e.g. hot spots, pop-ups, buttons, menus, rollover images)
o colour schemes, styles and templates (e.g. cascading style sheets, page layout,
size and position (text, links, assets, forms), text wrapping, background colours)
o embedded multimedia/digital asset content (e.g. digital graphics, digital video,
digital audio, digital animation)
o simple client-side scripts (e.g. embed JavaScript code to display a name in a
pop-up box)
o other formatting (e.g. HyperText Markup Language (HTML), Dynamic HyperText
Markup Language (DHTML))
o accessibility features (e.g. alternative tags, zoom features, text-to-speech)
o check browser compatibility to present web pages
o export and compress any digital assets into suitable file types (e.g. resolution
and size appropriate for web pages)
o suitable file names for web pages.
Website hosting:
web server
domain name
web hosting services.
Test the website:
Test the website for functionality, quality and usability
gather feedback from others (e.g. on content, presentation, navigation, usability,
accessibility, performance and purpose).
improve and/or refine to the website to improve accessibility, e.g.:
o alternative text tags
o zoom features
o text to speech features
improve and/or refine the website to enhance performance, e.g.:
o export and compress digital assets
o add dynamic functionality.
217

Learning aim D: Review the finished website
Reviewing a website
Review the finished website for:
fitness for purpose and user requirements
functionality
information/content including digital assets
user experience (e.g. usability, quality, performance)
constraints
strengths and potential improvements.
218
Level 2 Pass
Identify the intended use

and features of two
websites.

uses and features of two
different websites.

four page interlinked
website, with guidance,
including an outline of
the proposed solution.
1B.3
a test plan.#
a list of assets
a proposed solution

an eight page interlinked
website, including:

for the website.
interactive
components.#
aesthetic features

design for a website,
including:

in two websites improve
presentation, usability,
accessibility, and
performance.
Level 2 Merit

the website.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design a website
1A.1
Learning aim A: Understand the uses and features of websites
Level 1
Assessment criteria
including any design

constraints.#
219
how the design will

fulfil the purpose and
user requirements


websites.
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
Develop a website
containing four
interlinked web pages,
with guidance.
Test the website for

repairing any faults and
documenting changes,
with guidance.
1C.5
1C.6
220
Prepare assets and

content for the website,
with guidance.
1C.4
2C.M4 Develop a website

including interactive
components,
demonstrating
awareness of user
requirements and taking
account of usability.
2C.M5 Test interactivity and
gather feedback from
the website, and use it
to improve the website,
showing awareness of
user requirements.
2C.P5 Develop a website

containing at least eight
interlinked web pages,
demonstrating
awareness of purpose.
2C.P6 Test the website for

functionality and
faults, and documenting
changes.
2C.D3 Refine the website, to

improve accessibility and
performance, taking
account of user feedback
and test results.
Level 2 Distinction
2C.M3 Prepare assets and

content for the website
demonstrating
awareness of the users
sources fully referenced.
Level 2 Merit
2C.P4 Prepare assets and

content for the website,
demonstrating
listing sources of assets.
Learning aim C: Develop and test a website
Level 1
Level 2 Pass

website is suitable for

website is suitable for
and purpose.

which the finished
website meets the needs
of purpose and user
requirements, while
from others and
constraints.
Level 2 Merit
1D.7
Learning aim D: Review the finished website
Level 1
221

website against the
design and justify any
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resource required for this unit is website authoring software that allows
the creation of websites.
Learners should have access to an assignment brief to allow the learner to design a
website for a given purpose. The brief should ideally be written with a client in mind,
and should have clear objectives of what they want the website to present. The brief
should include details of any required text and digital assets (e.g. digital animation,
digital video, digital audio, digital graphics).
If the brief requires learners to create assets for the website, they will also need
access to suitable software in order to create audio, video, animation or graphics.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will investigate websites in order to understand the uses of two websites
and the purpose of their features. The websites should be designed for different
purposes.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the uses of two websites and the features they
include, e.g. a theatre website that allows users to purchase tickets in advance using
online payment methods, or a banking website that allows users to manage their
bank accounts securely.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified the intended uses of two
websites and their features, including text, digital assets and links.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how the features of the websites improves the
presentation, usability and accessibility, e.g. allowing users to customise the website
format so that people with visual difficulties can enlarge the text.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the websites in more detail to discuss their
strengths and weaknesses. They should discuss at least one strength and one
weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners will design, develop and test a website.
Scenarios suitable for a brief should allow learners to achieve all assessment criteria.
The brief should include:
the purpose of the website
the information (e.g. text) that must be provided
features that must be included (e.g. text, forms, frames, tables)
the user interaction that is required
digital assets to be included (e.g. digital animation, digital graphics, digital audio,
digital video).
222
Centres can allow learners to devise their own scenario for the brief. However, all
scenarios should be approved by the centre before being used in order to ensure
access to all assessment criteria.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the design and development of the
website as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: learners should describe the purpose and user requirements for their
website.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the purpose and user
requirements for their website.
For 2B.P3: learners must produce a design for an eight-page interlinked website.
The design documentation should include:
the proposed solution containing:
o a storyboard (with at least eight panels one per web page) that outline the layout,
content (e.g. text, assets and features)
o a description of styles, templates, formats and interactive features
o a site map including home page and file structure
o a description of the ready-made and/or original assets to be used
a list, in a sources table, of any original and/or ready-made assets
a test plan, giving an outline of the range of tests to check the functionality of the
website.
Learners should include a collection of website ideas or prototypes in their designs.
Learners should describe any styles, templates or formats, and include details of any
interactive features. They should outline at least four different original and/or readymade assets that they intend to use, and list the sources for these assets in a
sources table.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should design an outline proposed solution. The
outline of a proposed solution will contain a website structure including at least four
panels in a storyboard, a site map and an outline of two original or ready-made asset
to be used.
For 2B.M2: learners will be expected to add to their original design documentation
by considering complex tools and techniques.
Learners should include:
how colour schemes and page styles will be applied consistently in all of the web
pages
how interactive components that make use of simple client-side scripting will be
embedded, e.g. display a message to welcome the user, and how to make it easier
for users to navigate.
a brief outline of any alternative solutions for the intended website, e.g. the use of
different assets for the intended website. These do not have to be fully worked-up
designs.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify their design decisions, including why alternative
designs were rejected, explaining how the website will fulfil the stated purpose and
user requirements. Learners must also think about the constraints, e.g. software
availability and whether or not this will have an impact on developing the website.
If it does, are there any alternatives for developing the same solution?
223
Learning aim C
Learners will apply their practical skills and knowledge to develop and test a website.
For 2C.P4: learners should prepare assets (by gathering assets and creating them, if
required), and list the sources for ready-made assets. At least four assets should be
included, such as graphic images, audio clips and animations, as outlined in their
designs. They should demonstrate an awareness of the purpose of the website.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should prepare their assets with guidance.
Learners should include at least two assets in their websites.
For 2C.M3: learners should prepare their assets and content for the website which
has considered the user requirements of the website. All ready-made assets should
be fully referenced in a sources table, with enough detail for another person to
individually obtain the assets used.
For 2C.P5: learners should use appropriate website authoring software develop their
website using appropriate tools/techniques. They should demonstrate an awareness
of the purpose and the website should be based on their designs. Learners should
have developed a website that includes at least eight interlinked web pages with:
at least four different assets
internal and external hyperlinks
text
at least one table
forms
menus
colour schemes and styles.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have developed a website, with guidance,
which includes at least four interlinked web pages, with text, a table, hyperlinks and
two assets.
For 2C.M4: learners should improve their website, taking account of usability and
user requirements. Learners should include interactive components that make use of
simple client-side scripting, e.g. JavaScript code that displays the date and time.
An example of improving usability would be consistent colour schemes and styles in
all web pages (using a method like cascading style sheets).
design) and test the functionality of their website, and check that it is fit for purpose.
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they develop their website.
Learners will be expected to make the necessary repairs to their website. It is
important that learners make appropriate comments on their designs and test plans
about any issues they discover, and how they have resolved them.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have tested the website for functionality
and fitness for purpose. For this activity they will have needed guidance.
For 2C.M5: learners should test the functionality of the interactivity features of the
website. They should also test that the website meets the user requirements.
Learners should complete user-experience testing, with the help of a test user.
Learners should record this feedback as part of the testing process. While considering
the feedback, they should keep the user requirements of the website in mind.
Learners should use their feedback and test results to improve the website.
224
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the process of developing and testing a
website is an iterative process. When making refinements to their websites, learners
should take into account their test results and feedback from the client.
Learners should refine their website using tools and techniques to cater for
accessibility requirements and performance enhancements. For instance, learners
could use:
alternative text tags, text-to-speech to improve accessibility for users with hearing
or visual impairments
optimising assets to improve how quickly the website presents to the audience; if
not appropriately compressed, video, animation and graphics can slow a website.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P7: learners should explain why the product is suitable for the purpose and
user requirements. Learners should give one reason for the purpose and one relating
to user requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified how their website is fit for
purpose, for example, My website is suitable to advertise films as it includes posters
for recent film releases and links to film company websites and local cinemas.
For 2D.M6: learners should build on the explanations given in the Pass criteria, and
refer back to the user requirements and purpose as defined in their design. They
should also seek feedback from users about the final website. An interview would
be an ideal way of discussing the website with notes used to record the feedback.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate the initial design ideas/prototypes against the
final website in terms of overall user experience and client requirements in the
original brief. They should justify any changes that were made during development,
and explain the rationale for any changes. They should also give at least three
recommendations for improvements, but do not need to implement the
enhancements.
225
Investigating
Websites
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
226
Assignment
Criteria covered
Supporting material.
Presentation slides and notes.
Assessment evidence
Think about the strengths and weaknesses of

the websites.
Explain how these features could improve the

presentation, user experience, accessibility and
performance of the websites.
The client wants you to look at two existing

competitors websites, describing the features
used.
You work for a web-development company and

you have been asked to prepare a presentation
to the directors of a prospective client.
Scenario
The client has now provided some detailed

requirements.
Designing the
Website
2B.P2, 2B.M2
2B.P3, 2B.M3
2B.D2, (1B.2, 1B.3)
Describe any constraints that have affected

your design.
Explain why any ideas you are not using have

been rejected. Justify your design choices,
relating back to the user requirements.
a table of sources for the digital assets to

be used.
a test plan
digital assets to be used
storyboards to show the layout and structure

of the website
site map
interactive features
styles, templates and formats
website ideas/prototypes
purpose and user requirements
The designs should include:
You have been asked to develop and document

a design.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
List of assets.
Prototype ideas or images.
Diagrams.
Sources table.
Supported design documentation.
Assessment evidence
227
Reviewing the
Website
2D.P7, 2D.M6
2D.D4, (1D.7)
228
The client has asked you to develop the website

according to the design. Your website should
contain assets, hyperlinks, text, tables, forms,
menus, colour schemes, styles, and interactive
components (that include simple client-side
scripting).
Creating the
Website
2C.P4, 2C.P5
2C.P6, 2C.M3,
2C.M4, 2C.M5
2C.D3, (1C.4)
(1C.5, 1C.6)
Completed test plan, review

feedback, supporting reports.
Website at different stages,

supporting material and documented
discussion, annotated designs,
updated source table.
Assessment evidence
Having completed the website, you now need

to review it with the client. Why is your website
suitable for the client and the purpose of the
website? Include any improvements you could
make, and what the strengths of your design
are. Evaluate your website against your designs.
Justify your changes.
Test the website for functionality, presentation

and usability repairing any problems that arise.
Get feedback from the client on your website.
Refine your final website.
Improve the website by improving navigation,

accessibility and performance.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
UNIT 14: INSTALLING AND MAINTAINING COMPUTER HARDWARE
Unit 14:
Installing and Maintaining

Computer Hardware
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Technology systems can include a multitude of external hardware devices and internal
hardware components. Over time it is necessary to maintain the system to repair faults
(such as a loose component) and improve performance or upgrade the systems
functionality (for instance by installing a faster processor). Job roles that demonstrate
installing and maintaining computer hardware include computer technician, technical
support engineer, service team leader, and helpdesk engineer.
In this unit, you will develop an understanding of the benefits and implications of
installing and maintaining hardware in technology systems. For a specific brief, you will
install and maintain hardware in a technology system. This will involve finding and
repairing faults with the internal hardware components of a computer, such as the
processor or internal bus, and upgrading other internal components, such as adding a
network card or additional memory. You will also learn how to install a new external
hardware device, such as a printer or barcode scanner.
The technology system will then be tested for functionality and performance. Once
completed, you will review your modified technology system against the brief and obtain
feedback from the client, and evaluate possible improvements.
In particular, this unit develops skills from Unit 2: Technology Systems and supports
Unit 11: Computer Networks, Unit 15: Installing and Maintaining Computer Software and
Unit 16: Automated Computer Systems.
Learning aims
A understand the benefits and implications of installing and maintaining hardware
in technology systems
B plan installation and maintenance of hardware in a technology system
C install, maintain and test hardware in a technology system
D review the modified technology system.
229

Learning aim A: Understand the benefits and implications of installing and
maintaining hardware in technology systems
Computer hardware
Hardware to include:
internal components of a computer, e.g. network card, memory, processor
external hardware devices, e.g. printer, network router, barcode reader.
Reasons to maintain technology systems
Know why we maintain technology systems, e.g.:
to prevent faults occurring and/or to repair faults
to upgrade internal components, e.g. processor, memory and/or storage, to improve
performance
to upgrade external hardware devices to improve performance
to change system functionality, e.g. to network the technology system or allow
printing/scanning.
Know that:
computer faults are often connected to errors, mistakes, defects and/or failures
found with some components of a technology system
examples of typical faults include power supply faults, loose connections, and
graphics, sound or network card faults
faults vary depending on the hardware technology being maintained as hardware
evolves over time.
Benefits and implications of installing and maintaining hardware
Benefits, e.g.:
to reduce costs
to improve performance, e.g. efficiency and effectiveness
to improve/maintain customer service
to improve health and safety awareness.
continued
230

Implications, e.g.:
training
compatibility
decommissioning
service level agreements
risks, such as:
o electrostatic discharge (damage to components including printed circuit boards,
memory cards)
o component damage
o data risk, (data loss, data corruption)
o other risks (e.g. service loss).
How these implications could impact on an individual or organisation, e.g.:
upgrading a hard disk drive could mean losing valuable data
causing an electrostatic discharge to a new processor could damage the component
resulting in a financial loss.
231

Learning aim B: Plan installation and maintenance of hardware in a technology
system
Planning for installation and maintenance
Plan to include:
purpose of the installation or maintenance, e.g. compatibility, increased capacity,
increased speed, increased reliability, software requirements, network requirements
requirements of the brief (client/user requirements)
alternative ideas for installing and maintaining hardware, i.e. there will be more than
one way of improving the performance of the technology system, e.g. by increasing
the memory or upgrading the processor
hardware required, e.g.:
o internal components of a computer, such as:
motherboard
central processing unit (CPU) or graphics processing unit (GPU)
memory
sound/video/network cards
heat dispersal systems, e.g. fans, heat sinks
storage devices, e.g. solid state, optical, magnetic
power supply unit (PSU)
connectors/ports
o external hardware devices, such as:
monitor
printer
scanner
webcam
router
storage devices
broadcasting devices
lighting and/or sound devices
tools required, e.g.:
o antistatic equipment, e.g. antistatic packaging, wrist straps, antistatic mats
o computer toolkits, e.g. chip inserter, chip extractor, assembly tweezers, slotted
screwdriver, Phillips screwdriver, Torx screwdriver
software resources, e.g. printer driver, installation setup and configuration
installation and maintenance activity list, e.g. replace the motherboard battery,
remove the heat sink and fan to access the processor, back up data and add a printer
(external device) as part of an upgrade
constraints (costs and technical), e.g. component cost, hardware and software
availability, tools and component/device compatibility
test plan and, if appropriate, test data (for functionality and performance).
232

Learning aim C: Install, maintain and test hardware in a technology system
Install and maintain hardware
Preparation, e.g.:
read manufacturers hardware instructions
test selection
test configuration
health and safety considerations, including antistatic equipment, precautions
obtain resources (tools, hardware components and devices, access rights, software
resources)
check equipment
other tasks (backing up data, recording serial numbers).
Fault finding
Tools and techniques, e.g.:
utility
run-time analysers
test procedures, e.g. follow a test plan
validating information
responding to test plan (error messages, inconsistent data)
loose connections
jumper settings
power support
power-on self-test (POST)
diagnostic software.
Installation and maintenance activities
Activities including, e.g.:
fit new components and reconnect components and devices
reassemble the computer system
download software resources (hardware drivers)
clean
carry out safety checks
system test
dispose of packaging
other tasks (i.e. restore data).
Feedback from client, e.g. functionality and performance.
Potential improvements to the technology system (e.g. performance, capacity,
accessibility, reliability, security, user requirements).
continued
233

Health and safety issues throughout the installation and maintenance of a computer
system, e.g.:
hardware
electrical connection risks and guidelines
handling equipment
Learning aim D: Review the modified technology system
Review the modified technology system against:
the original brief (client/user requirements)
purpose
choice of hardware components
constraints, e.g. budget and compatibility of hardware components.
234
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Level 2 Distinction
Identify the benefits of

installing and
maintaining hardware for
two different technology
systems.
2A.P1 Explain the benefits of

installing and maintaining
hardware for two different
technology systems.
1A.1
2A.M1 Review how installing

and maintaining
hardware for one
technology system
could impact an
individual or
organisation.
235

and weaknesses of
hardware for a given
technology system.
Learning aim A: Understand the benefits and implications of installing and maintaining hardware in technology systems
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
236
Produce a plan for

installing and
maintaining hardware in
a technology system,
with guidance, including:
1B.3
a list of hardware
components and
devices and software
resources required for
an upgrade.
a list of installation
and maintenance
activities

installing and
maintaining hardware in
a technology system.
1B.2
a test plan.
a description of faultfinding tools and

techniques
2B.M2 Produce a detailed plan

alternative ideas for
installing and
maintaining hardware
2B.D2 Justify final decisions,

explaining how the
technology system will
fulfil the stated
purpose and client
requirements,
describing the impact
of any constraints on
the plan.
Level 2 Distinction
a description of hardware
components and devices
and software resources
required for an upgrade
a list of installation and

maintenance activities
2B.P3 Produce a plan for installing

and maintaining hardware in
a technology system
including:
2B.P2 Describe the purpose and

hardware in a technology
system.
Learning aim B: Plan installation and maintenance of hardware in a technology system
Level 1
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Test the modified

technology system for
functionality and repair
any faults, with
guidance.
upgrade of at least
one internal hardware
component.
repair of at least one

different internal
hardware component
faults
Install and maintain

system, with guidance,
that includes the:
2C.P5 Test the modified

functionality against the
purpose and repair any
faults as necessary.
installation of at least one

additional external
hardware device.
upgrade of at least two

different internal
hardware components
repair of at least two

different internal
hardware component
faults
2C.P4 Install and maintain

system that includes the:
1C.5
1C.4
2C.M4 Test the modified

technology system and
gather feedback, and
user experience.
2C.M3 Install and maintain

hardware in a
technology system,
using appropriate tools
and techniques to
protect the data and
system settings,
demonstrating
requirements and
taking account of
usability.
Learning aim C: Install, maintain and test hardware in a technology system
Level 1
2C.D3 Refine the modified

technology system in
order to improve
performance, taking
Level 2 Distinction
237
Level 2 Pass
For the modified

technology system,
identify how it is suitable
for the intended purpose
and original
requirements.
2D.P6 Explain how the modified

technology system is
purpose and original
requirements.
238
1D.6
Level 1
2D.D4 Evaluate the initial plan

against the modified
technology system and
justify any changes that
were made, making
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction

which the modified
technology system
meets the original
requirements,
from others and any
constraints.
Level 2 Merit
Teacher guidance
Resources
As a minimum, each learner will need to access a technology system that can be
dismantled, repaired and upgraded to meet a brief. Learners will need:
access to internal hardware components in a computer, e.g. a memory card,
processor, hard disk drive, optical storage device, graphics card
at least one additional external hardware device, e.g. a printer, scanner, webcam.
It is important that the hardware components and devices have the accompanying
manuals and any software installation disks (or at least links to download these from
the manufacturers website).
The practical activities should take place in a workshop with appropriate tools and
take account of health and safety requirements.
Learners need access to a brief. The brief can either be created by the centre or be
generated by the learner and approved by the centre.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will develop an understanding of the computer hardware in two different
technology systems, describing the benefits and implications of maintaining them.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the benefits of installing and maintaining
hardware in two different technology systems. For example, a benefit for a
computer owner of maintaining their own technology system is saving on
consultancy and labour costs.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified the benefits of installing
and maintaining the hardware in two different technology systems. They are likely
to have listed only two examples, without any description.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how installing and maintaining the hardware
in one technology system could affect an individual or organisation. For example,
hardware components could be damaged during an installation or upgrade because
of mishandling, resulting in a financial loss to a business.
For 2A.D1: learners should discuss the strengths and weaknesses of hardware for
a given technology system. For example, one weakness of the hardware could be
that the manufacturers warranty could be void if anyone attempts to upgrade the
technology system. Learners should discuss at least one strength and at least one
weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should have an understanding of the typical faults found in most technology
systems, as well as the range of hardware components that could be upgraded to
improve performance.
239
Learners will establish the requirements for installing and maintaining hardware
in a technology system based on a brief. The brief should allow learners to explore
different possibilities for fulfilling the requirements. It should also allow them to
produce a plan, outlining their ideas for repairing and upgrading a technology
system, for both the internal hardware components of the computer and external
hardware devices. The brief should ideally be written with a client in mind and must
include the following requirements (as a minimum):
the reason (purpose) for a change to the hardware in a technology system and/or
user requirements, and the requirements of any client for the system
a description of at least two different faults (arising from malfunctioning internal
hardware components of a technology system)
an outline of at least two different performance enhancements that would require
the internal hardware components of a computer to be upgraded, e.g. additional
memory to stream video
a description of additional system functionality that would require the addition of at
least one new external hardware device
any special requirements/instructions/configuration
timeframe
budget (costs)
constraints.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the installation and maintenance of the
technology system as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital
Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: in order to produce a plan for the installation and maintenance of hardware
in a technology system, learners must first be able to understand and interpret the
requirements from the brief. Learners should be able to provide a description of the
purpose and client requirements for installing and maintaining hardware in a technology
system.
If it is to be upgraded, learners will need to investigate the technology system to get an
idea of its current state of repair and of its capabilities. It is expected that learners will
lift the lid of the technology system to maintain and upgrade what is inside.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners will identify the client requirements and purpose for
installing and maintaining hardware in a technology system.
For 2B.P3: learners will plan the installation and maintenance of hardware in a
technology system.
They should include:
a list of installation and maintenance activities
a description of internal hardware components and external hardware devices
software resources they would need to carry out an upgrade, including the role of
the software and its relationship to the technology system and user
a description of fault-finding tools and techniques to determine the hardware faults
(observation, diagnostic tools).
They should also provide a test plan to cover the installation and maintenance of
hardware in a technology system, giving an outline of the range of tests that they will
perform once the technology system is modified. The test plan should also clearly show
how they would find system faults, e.g. use of diagnostic tools and software.
240
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce, with guidance, a plan for the
installation and maintenance of hardware in a technology system. An outline plan would
contain a list of installation and maintenance activities to be carried out, and a list of
hardware components and devices and software resources needed for the upgrade.
For 2B.M2: learners should consider alternative ideas for an upgrade within their plan.
For example, in a scenario to increase the performance of a technology system, the
alternatives to achieve this could include increasing the memory, swapping the processor
or replacing magnetic hard disk drives for new solid state disk drives.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify decisions in their plan, explaining why they have
chosen different hardware components, fault-finding tools and techniques while rejecting
others, making reference to the given purpose and the client requirements. Learners
must also think about constraints, e.g. the availability of tools and hardware and whether
or not this will have an impact on maintaining the hardware in a technology system. If it
does, are there any alternatives for modifying the technology system to meet the same
requirements? For example, if the client requires an 80 GB hard disk drive but the only
size available is 160 GB, consideration of this would be sufficient to cover the
requirements.
Learning aim C
Learners will install and maintain hardware in a technology system. They should
apply their practical skills and knowledge to do this.
For 2C.P4: learners should use appropriate resources and fault-finding tools and
techniques (as identified in their plan) to install and maintain the hardware in a
technology system.
As a minimum, learners should have used appropriate fault-finding tools and
techniques to identify and repair at least two different internal hardware faults in a
technology system. They should also install and configure (upgrade) at least two
internal hardware components and add at least one additional external hardware
device.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should repair at least one internal hardware
faults and upgrade at least one internal hardware component, with guidance.
For 2C.M3: learners should demonstrate good practice to protect data and system
settings when maintaining hardware in a technology system. Learners should use
appropriate tools and techniques to safely back up data prior to making any
modifications to the technology system. They should also safely restore the data and
system settings to the technology system after the modifications are complete. The
modified technology system must demonstrate the learners awareness of purpose,
meet the user requirements and improve the usability of the system.
For 2C.P5: learners will be expected to follow their test plans (as identified in their
plan) and test for functionality and purpose against the original requirements of the
modification.
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they install and maintain the
hardware in a technology system. Where this happens, learners are expected to
troubleshoot and resolve the difficulties, finding and repairing any internal computer
hardware faults. It is important that learners make appropriate comments in their
plans and test plans about any issues they discover and how they resolved them.
Where appropriate to do so, it is acceptable to photograph problems and solutions or
use witness statements and observation records as evidence of this process.
Learners must adhere to all health and safety guidelines when undertaking practical
activities with electronic equipment.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should test their system and repair any faults,
with guidance.
241
For 2C.M4: learners will be required to test the functionality of the technology
system while ensuring that data is safely backed up and that system settings can be
restored. Learners will also complete user-experience testing with the help of at least
one person who can act as the client. The client should be commenting on the
usability and the user-experience of the modified technology system. Learners should
record this feedback as part of the testing process.
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the process of installing, maintaining and
testing hardware in technology systems is an iterative one.
Learners should refine the modified technology system in order to improve its
performance. Learners are also expected to make further refinements based on their
test results and feedback. These refinements will probably involve customising the
hardware components to suit the client. Other refinements could include accessing
the advanced settings of the hardware components to see if they can be customised
to make full use of their features and capabilities in a way that satisfies the client or
user, for example, by using software drivers to optimise a graphics card that takes
full advantage of memory and processing power. This can be achieved by either
reallocating physical memory resources or utilising USB flash drives to extend and
support the memory, for example, ReadyBoost. Cleaning the internal hardware
components, such as the power supply unit or heat sink, will also improve the
performance of a technology system and prevent any overheating caused by
particle build-up.
If it is not possible for learners to apply their refinements (for example, because of
software or hardware constraints), learners should explain what they would do if they
had the opportunity, focusing on performance. For example, the scarcity of highperformance graphics cards could prevent learners from refining the modified
technology system. However, they could discuss how these graphics cards would
improve performance with an explanation of how they would be configured.
All of the ideas from testing, reviewing and receiving feedback on the modified
technology system should be considered as learners go through the refinement
process.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should explain why their modified technology system is suitable
for the intended purpose and the original requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their modified technology
system is suitable for the purpose and the original requirements.
For 2D.M5: learners should build on the explanations for the Pass criteria, and
review how well the client requirements and purpose have been met, and should
include details of how any constraints have affected the modified system. They
should also seek feedback from the client about the modified technology system.
An interview would be an ideal way of discussing the modified technology system
and recording the feedback.
Learners should consider any constraints that they have had to deal with when
modifying the system.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their initial plans against the modified
technology system. They should justify any changes that were made and explain the
rationale for those changes. They should also give recommendations for at least
three improvements but do not need to implement any enhancements.
242
Investigation
2A.P1, 2A.M1,
2A.D1, (1A.1)

client.
You need to consider the strengths and

weaknesses of the hardware for a given
technology system.
the implications for the organisation of

maintaining hardware in at least one
technology system.
the benefits of installing and maintaining

hardware in at least two different technology
systems
They want to know:
Before the client decides whether to buy a

brand new system, they would like some
advice from you about repairing and
maintaining the existing system.
For this scenario, a client manages a small

company with employees who use technology
systems. They have found a few technical
problems.
You work as a consultant for an IT company

that specialises in maintaining technology
systems.
Scenario
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Interview.
Report.
Presentation.
Web page.
Assessment evidence
243
244
The client would like you to upgrade and

maintain the hardware in one technology
system.
Planning
2B.P2, 2B.M2,
2B.P3, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Report.
Web page.
Assessment evidence
It is important that you explain how the plan

meets the purpose and client requirements
and what effect it will have on users.
You must also consider alternative ideas, e.g.

alternative hardware solutions that will fulfil
the same purpose.
a test plan.
a description of fault-finding tools and

techniques
a description of hardware components and

devices and software resources required for
an upgrade
a list of the installation and maintenance

activities
Produce a plan to include:
Your task is to plan the installation and

maintenance of hardware to fulfil your user
requirements for the client.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered

start maintaining the technology system.
Repair and
Upgrade
Review
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5,
2C.M4, (1C.5),
2C.D3
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4, (1D.6)
Evaluate the modified technology system,

explaining why and how it meets the brief,
suggesting improvements and considering any
constraints.

modified technology system to improve the
overall performance, taking on board feedback
from your client and test results.

modified technology system.
Test the modified technology system for

functionality and performance and record the
results.
5) restore all data and system settings.
4) install and configure at least one external

hardware device as part of an upgrade
3) install and configure at least two different

internal hardware components in a
technology as part of an upgrade
2) fault-find and repair at least two different

hardware faults within the technology
system
1) safely back up all data and system settings

in preparation for a system restore
You must demonstrate that you can follow

your plan to:
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Report.
Witness statements.
Assessment evidence
245
246
UNIT 15: INSTALLING AND MAINTAINING COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Unit 15:
Installing and Maintaining

Computer Software
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Computer software brings technology systems to life and is the main way we control
and communicate with systems. Types of software include the operating system
(OS), which supports the communication and management of resources, and
application software, such as office programs and graphics packages designed
to help the user perform specific tasks.
Over time it is necessary to install and maintain software in a system. This includes
customising software applications to improve productivity, for instance to create new
menus and keyboard short cuts. Job roles that require installing and maintaining
computer software include computer technician, technical support engineer, service
team leader, and helpdesk engineer.
In this unit, you will develop an understanding of the benefits and implications of
installing and maintaining software in technology systems. As specified in a brief,
you will learn how to install and maintain software in a technology system. This will
involve installing and upgrading an operating system and different software
applications, such as office or multimedia programs.
You will also customise different components of software applications to improve
productivity, for example to create new toolbars and automate a range of tasks
using a macro. The technology system will be tested for functionality, usability and
productivity. Once completed, you will review your modified technology system
against the brief and obtain feedback from the client, having obtained feedback
from others, and evaluate possible improvements.
In particular, this unit develops skills from Unit 2: Technology Systems, Unit 9:
Spreadsheet Development, Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development, Unit 12: Software
Development, and supports Unit 11: Computer Networks and Unit 14: Installing and
Maintaining Computer Hardware.
Learning aims
A understand the benefits and implications of installing and maintaining software in
technology systems
B plan installation and maintenance of software in a technology system
C install, maintain and test software in a technology system
D review the modified technology system.
247

Learning aim A: Understand the benefits and implications of installing and
maintaining software in technology systems
Computer software
Types of software, e.g.:
software applications (computer programs such as word processing, spreadsheets,
databases, email)
system software (such as operating systems, system utilities, network utilities,
device drivers)
programming software (such as compilers, interpreters, integrated development
environments).
Why we install and maintain computer software
Reasons to install and maintain computer software, e.g.:
to keep up to date with modern technologies
to customise different components of software applications to meet users needs
to prevent software problems occurring and/or to repair software problems
to upgrade software (such as office applications, operating systems, device drivers)
to change system functionality (such as media centre, network, other specialist
purposes).
Benefits and implications of installing and maintaining software
Benefits:
to reduce costs
to improve productivity, e.g. configuration and customisation, specialist tools, time
saving, error reduction, improved user perception
for customisation, e.g.:
o speed (reducing key strokes)
o accuracy (control data entry)
o ease of use
o style consistency (standardised templates)
to improve performance, e.g. efficiency and effectiveness
to improve user experience
to improve communication
to improve/maintain customer service
to apply software updates made available by manufacturer
to improve security or stability, e.g. piloting software to evaluate how it integrates
with current technology systems.
continued
248

Implications, e.g.:
training requirements
compatibility issues
decommissioning
service level agreements
increase in complexity
support needs
costs and licensing, including copyright
software issues, such as a new release of software can often present unforeseen
faults (bugs) that are usually repaired through later software updates
risks:
o data risk (such as data loss, data corruption)
o other risks (such as service loss)
issues of software piracy
registration.
How installing and maintaining computer software could improve the productivity for an
individual or organisation, e.g.:
updating the operating system will ensure that any new software applications are
compatible with the latest standards
customising a spreadsheet using macros to automate calculations and functions will
result in saved time and improved efficiency.
249

Learning aim B: Plan installation and maintenance of software in a technology
system
Planning to install and maintain software
Plan to include:
purpose of the installation or upgrade, e.g. compatibility, change in system
functionality, upgrade, improve productivity (performance, speed, reliability)
requirements of the brief (client/user requirements)
alternative ideas for installing and maintaining software, e.g. there will be more than
one system software or software application available that will contain the same
features and perform the same function
tasks/activities, e.g. install or upgrade an operating system, customise a spreadsheet
to suit users requirements, install or upgrade an office application, install software
updates to the operating system
software resources required, such as:
o software applications, e.g.:
office applications, e.g. word processors, spreadsheets, databases, desktop
publishing, email, web browsers
bespoke applications, e.g. custom-built specialist software designed for a
specific purpose
o system software, e.g.:
operating systems, e.g. open source, Windows-based, Mac-based
utility software, e.g. antivirus, home protection, security, data and system
backup and restoration, defragmenter
software drivers, e.g. new hardware device installation
o tools, e.g.
installation disks
operating instructions
registration information
software licence/product keys, e.g. creative commons, single or multi-user
licence
constraints (costs and technical), e.g. software costs/licensing, software availability,
tools
test/troubleshoot plan to test functionality and usability.
250

Learning aim C: Install, maintain and test software in a technology system
Install and maintain software in a technology system
Preparation, e.g.:
read manufacturers software instructions
test selection and configuration
obtain resources, e.g. access rights, software installation resources and tools
determine software installation source, e.g. media type, internet-based,
synchronisation application, critical update from software provider
check compatibility, e.g. software specification, storage requirements, technology
system requirements, user requirements
other tasks, e.g. backing up data, setting restore points, uninstalling existing
software, software licence keys
establish configuration, e.g. setting correct date/time, language settings, network
and establish customisation, e.g. toolbars, menus, shortcuts, other user preferences.
Installation and maintenance activities
Process, e.g.
identify software and purpose, (operating system software, software applications,
bespoke software applications, utility software)
download or gather software resources
carry out pre-installation and post-installation checks
back up data and system settings
set restore points
customise software applications
system test
dispose of/recycle packaging
other tasks, e.g. restore data and system settings.
Customisation
Tools and techniques, e.g.:
creating or changing components, e.g.:
o default settings
o menus
o toolbars
o templates
o shortcuts
o forms
o macros.
Feedback from client, e.g. functionality, usability, productivity.
Refinements to the technology system to improve productivity, e.g. customising
software applications by creating macros and forms.
Potential improvements to the technology system, e.g. performance, accessibility,
reliability, security, clients requirements.
251

Review the finished software installation against:
original client and user requirements
purpose
suitability of choice of software resources
any special requirements
constraints.
252
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Level 2 Distinction
Identify the benefits of

installing and
maintaining software for
two different technology
systems.
2A.P1 Explain the benefits of

software for two different
technology systems.
1A.1
2A.M1 Review how installing

and maintaining
software in one
technology system
could improve
productivity for an
individual or
organisation.

and weaknesses of
software for a given
technology system.
Learning aim A: Understand the benefits and implications of installing and maintaining software in technology systems
Level 1
Assessment criteria
253
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
254
Produce a plan for

installing and
maintaining software in
a technology system,
with guidance, including:
1B.3
a list of software
resources required for
an installation or
upgrade.
a list of installation
and maintenance
activities

installing and
maintaining software in
a technology system.
1B.2
a test plan.
2B.M2 Produce a detailed plan

alternative ideas for
installing and
maintaining software
2B.D2 Justify final decisions,

explaining how the
technology system will
fulfil the stated
purpose and client
requirements,
describing the impact
of any constraints on
the plan.
Level 2 Distinction
a description of
customisation tools and
techniques
a description of software
resources required for an
installation or upgrade
a list of installation and

maintenance activities
2B.P3 Produce a plan for installing

and maintaining software in
a technology system
including:
2B.P2 Describe the purpose and

software in a technology
system.
Learning aim B: Plan installation and maintenance of software in a technology system
Level 1
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
Test the modified

functionality and repair
any faults, with
guidance.
customisation of at
least two different
components in
software
application(s).
installation or upgrade
of at least one
different software
applications
Install and maintain

that includes the:
2C.P5 Test the modified

functionality against the
purpose, and repair any
faults as necessary.
customisation of at least
three different
components in software
application(s).
installation or upgrade of
at least two different
software applications
installation or upgrade of
one operating system
2C.P4 Install and maintain

system that includes the:
1C.5
1C.4
2C.M4 Test the modified

technology system,
gather feedback, and
functionality,
productivity and user
experience.
2C.M3 Install and maintain

software in a
technology system,
using appropriate tools
and techniques to
protect the data and
system settings,
demonstrating
requirements and
taking account of
usability.
Learning aim C: Install, maintain and test software in a technology system
Level 1
2C.D3 Refine the modified

technology system in
order to improve
productivity, taking
Level 2 Distinction
255
Level 2 Pass
For the modified

technology system,
identify how it is suitable
for the intended purpose
and original
requirements.
256

which the modified
technology system
meets the original
requirements while
from others and the
effect of any
constraints.
Level 2 Merit
2D.D4 Evaluate the initial

plan against the
modified technology
system and justify any
changes that were
made, making
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction
2D.P6 Explain how the modified

technology system is
original requirements and
purpose.
1D.6
Learning Aim D: Review the modified technology system
Level 1
Teacher guidance
Resources
As a minimum, each learner will need access to a technology system that will allow
them to install, upgrade, maintain and customise software to meet a brief.
Learners will need:
operating system software, e.g. open source, Windows-based, Mac-based
at least two different software applications capable of customisation, e.g. office
software, media software.
It is important that software resources are accompanied by the relevant manuals,
installation disks (or software package downloaded in advance from the
manufacturers website), software licence/products keys, and any registration
information.
The practical activities should take place with appropriate resources and tools.
It is recommended that free resources are obtained for the practical activities.
Learners need access to a brief. The brief can either be created by the centre or be
generated by the learner and approved by the centre.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will investigate and understand the computer software in two different
technology systems, explaining the benefits and implications of installation and
maintenance.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the benefits and implications of installing and
maintaining computer software in two different technology systems. For example, a
benefit would include staying up to date with the latest security software to capture
and quarantine new viruses. An implication may include the prohibitive costs of some
software licences.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the benefits of installing and
maintaining the software in two different technology systems. They are likely to have
listed only two examples, without any description.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how installing and maintaining the software in
one technology system could improve productivity for an individual or organisation.
For example, customising a spreadsheet using a macro could save time and improve
efficiency for an organisation by automating calculations and function.
For 2A.D1: learners should discuss the strengths and weaknesses of software for a
given technology system. For example, one weakness of software is that it could be
reliant on specialised hardware attached to the technology system. Learners should
discuss at least one strength and at least one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners will establish the requirements for installing and maintaining software in
a technology system, based on a brief. The brief should allow learners to explore
different possibilities for fulfilling the requirements. It should also allow them to
produce a plan of their ideas for installing and/or upgrading system software and
software applications, as well as for customising software applications for a given
257
purpose. Ideally, the brief should be written with a client in mind, with clearly stated
resource requirements and objectives.
the reason (purpose) for a change to the software in a technology system and
user/client requirements
an outline of the technology system that requires an installation or upgrade of an
operating system
an outline of at least two different computer enhancements that would require an
installation or upgrade of software applications, e.g. to upgrade existing office
software to take advantage of new features and to keep office documents
consistent for all users
an outline of at least three different components of one or more software
applications that could be customised to meet a given purpose, e.g. creating a
new menu in an office program that displays a list of users most-used functions
an outline of any refinements that would require macros and/or forms to be
created as part of customising a software application, e.g. a macro to automate a
calculation task in a spreadsheet
timeframe
budget (costs)
constraints.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the installation and maintenance of
the technology system as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital
Portfolio).
For 2B.P2: in order to produce a plan for the installation and maintenance of
software in a technology system, learners must first be able to understand and
interpret the requirements from the brief. Learners should be able to provide a
description of the purpose and client requirements for installing and maintaining
software in a technology system.
If the technology system is to be upgraded or customised, learners will need to
investigate it to get an idea of its current state and what it is capable of doing.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners will identify the client requirements and purpose
for installing and maintaining software in a technology system.
For 2B.P3: learners will plan the installation and maintenance of software in a
technology system.
They should include:
a list of installation and maintenance activities
a description of software resources required for the installation or upgrade
a description of the customisation tools and techniques needed to meet the client
requirements.
They should also provide a test plan to cover the installation and maintenance (including
customisation) of software in a technology system, giving an outline of the range of tests
that they will perform once the system is modified.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce, with guidance, a plan for the
installation and maintenance of software in a technology system. An outline plan should
contain a list of installation and maintenance activities to be carried out, and a list of
software resources needed for the installation or upgrade.
258
For 2B.M2: learners should consider alternative ideas for installing and maintaining
software within their plan. For example, in a scenario where the technology system is
intended to be used for working with digital images, there are different graphics and
artwork packages available that users can use to achieve the same purpose. Learners
should consider the distinctive features and benefits of different types of software when
suggesting ideas in their plan.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify decisions in their plan, explaining why they have
chosen different software resources and customisation tools and techniques while
rejecting others, making reference to the given purpose and the client requirements.
Learners must also think about constraints, for example the availability of tools and
software, and whether or not this will have an impact on maintaining the software in a
technology system. If it does, are there any alternatives for modifying the system to
meet the same requirements? For example, if the client requires an operating system
but there is no budget for purchasing a new operating system, it would be sufficient to
obtain an open-source operating system from the internet and install this, to meet the
same requirements.
Learning aim C
Learners will install and maintain software in a technology system. They should apply
their practical skills and knowledge to do this.
For 2C.P4: learners should use appropriate resources and customisation tools and
techniques (as identified in their plan) to install and maintain the software in a
technology system.
As a minimum, learners should have installed or upgraded and appropriately
configured an operating system. They should have also installed or upgraded at least
two different software applications, for example an office program or a multimedia
program, as well as customised at least three different components of any installed
software applications, for example create a new menu, change a toolbar or create a
keyboard shortcut.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should install or upgrade at least one software
application and customise at least two different components in one or more software
applications, with guidance. It is assumed that learners will be provided with a
technology system that already has an operating system installed.
For 2C.M3: learners should demonstrate good practice to protect data and system
settings when maintaining software in a technology system. Learners should use
appropriate tools and techniques to safely back up data prior to making any
modifications to the technology system. They should also safely restore the data and
system settings to the technology system after the modifications are complete.
The modified technology system must demonstrate the learners awareness of the
user requirements and improve the usability of the systems.
For 2C.P5: learners will be expected to follow their test plans (as identified in their
plan) and test for functionality and purpose against the original requirements.
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they install and maintain
the software in a technology system. Where this happens, learners are expected
to troubleshoot and resolve these difficulties, finding and resolving any software
problems. It is important that learners make appropriate comments in their plans
and test plans with regard to any problems they discover and how they have
resolved them. Where appropriate to do so, it is acceptable to photograph or take
screenshots of problems and solutions or use witness statements and observation
records as evidence of this process.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should test their system and repair any faults,
with guidance.
259
For 2C.M4: learners are required to test the usability of the technology system while
ensuring that data is safely backed up and system settings can be restored. Learners
will complete user-experience testing, with the help of at least one person who can
act as the client. The client should be commenting on the functionality and usability
of the modified technology system. Learners should record this feedback as part of
the testing process.
For 2C.D3: teachers should recognise that the process of installing, maintaining and
testing software in technology systems is an iterative process.
Learners should refine the modified technology system to improve productivity.
Learners are also expected to make further refinements based on their test results
and feedback. This must include customising software applications by either creating
a macro or by creating a form for a given purpose. For example, they might create a
new macro in a spreadsheet that will automate calculations and functions, or they
might create a new user-friendly form that will allow users to enter records into a
database.
All of the ideas from testing, reviewing and receiving feedback on the modified
technology system should be considered as learners go through the refinement
process.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should explain how their modified technology system is suitable
for the intended purpose and the original requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their modified technology
system is suitable for the purpose and the original requirements.
For 2D.M5: learners should build on the explanations for the Pass criterion, and
review how well the client requirements and purpose have been met. They should
also seek feedback from the client about the modified technology system. An
interview would be an ideal way of discussing the modified technology system and
recording the feedback. Learners should provide details of how any constraints have
affected the modified system.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their initial plans against the modified
technology system. They should justify any changes that were made and explain the
rationale for those changes. They should also give recommendations for at least
three improvements but do not need to implement any enhancements.
260
Investigation
2A.P1, 2A.M1,
2A.D1, (1A.1)

client.
You need to consider the strengths and

weaknesses of the software for a given
technology system.
how software in at least one technology

system could help improve productivity in
their organisation.
the benefits and implications of installing

and maintaining software in at least two
different technology systems
They want to know:
For this scenario, a client manages a small

company with employees that use technology
systems.
You work as a software installation engineer

for an IT company that specialises in
maintaining technology systems.
Scenario
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Interview.
Report.
Presentation.
Web page.
Assessment evidence
261
262
The client would like you to install and

maintain the software in one technology
system.
Planning
2B.P2, 2B.M2,
2B.P3, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
Report.
Web page
Assessment evidence
It is important that you explain how the plan

meets the purpose and client requirements
and what effect it will have on users.
You must also consider alternative ideas, e.g.

different software or customisation tools and
techniques of software installation that will
fulfil the same purpose.
a test plan.
a description of customisation tools and

techniques you will use when customising
software applications to improve
productivity
a description of software resources required

for an installation or upgrade
a list of the installation and maintenance

activities
Produce a plan to include:
Your task is to plan the installation and

maintenance of software to fulfil your clients
requirements.
Scenario
Assignment title
Criteria covered

start maintaining the technology system.
Installing and
Maintaining
2C.P4, 2C.M3,
(1C.4), 2C.P5,
2C.M4, (1C.5),
2C.D3

modified technology system to improve the
overall performance, taking on board feedback
from your client and test results.

modified technology system.
Test the modified technology system for

functionality and usability and record the
results.
restore all data and system settings.
make further refinements to the technology

system by customising software applications
to improve productivity this must include
implementing either a macro or form
customise at least three different

components in one or more installed
install or upgrade at least two different

install or upgrade and appropriately

configure an operating system
safely back up all data and system settings

in preparation for a system restore
You must demonstrate that you can follow

your plan to:
Scenario
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Witness statements
Assessment evidence
263
Review
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4, (1D.6)
264
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Report.
Assessment evidence
Evaluate the modified technology system,

explaining why it meets the brief, suggesting
improvements and considering any
constraints.
Scenario
UNIT 16: AUTOMATED COMPUTER SYSTEMS
Unit 16:
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
Automated computer systems feature heavily in our technological lifestyles. We are
surrounded by technology systems that monitor and perform activities on our behalf,
from central heating controllers regulating our environment to robots exploring the
universe.
The development of automated computer systems is becoming essential across the
world for manufacturing, security systems and home, industrial and transportation
systems. Being able to develop and work with automated systems could lead to a
challenging, varied and exciting career in any number of various roles in different
companies, for example an electronic engineer and software engineer.
In this unit, you will investigate the characteristics, including benefits and features, of
existing automated systems. Using a suitable self-assembly kit, you will design and
develop an automated system for a brief. You will develop the system by making
progress in small steps and building up programs that can control hardware devices
by monitoring sensors and controlling outputs. To do this, you will learn some control
programming, hardware assembly and trouble shooting skills.
You will review your final automated system and identify any further improvements.
This unit develops skills from Unit 2: Technology Systems, Unit 8: Mobile Apps
Development, Unit 11: Computer Networks, Unit 12: Software Development and
Unit 14: Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware.
Learning aims
A understand the characteristics of automated systems
B design an automated system
C develop and test an automated system
D review the finished automated system.
265

Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics of automated systems
Automated systems
Automated systems contain hardware devices that are controlled by software programs
that undertake specific activities based on inputs and outputs.
Characteristics of automated systems
Features
Benefits
Reasons for use
Why automated systems are used
Reasons, e.g.:
operating in hazardous environments, e.g. satellites in space
completing monotonous tasks, e.g. food-packaging machinery
completing precision tasks, e.g. manufacturing engineering components
monitoring and control, e.g. temperature control system.
Benefits, e.g.:
reduced costs
improved performance, e.g. efficiency and effectiveness
customisation, e.g. custom-made engineered parts
improved repeatability (completing the same activity with a high degree of accuracy)
improved customer service.
Features of automated systems
Know that automated systems comprise hardware and control software programs.
Systems include:
hardware devices, including:
o programmable devices/microcontrollers
o input devices, e.g. touch and temperature sensors
o output devices, e.g. LEDs, motors
o other components, e.g. power source, mechanical structures
control software programs, e.g. code to make a light or LED flash or to operate a
line-following robot.
Use flow charts to represent processes within basic control programs.
266

Learning aim B: Design an automated system
Designing an automated system
Design to include:
intended purpose and client/user requirements (as defined in a brief)
at least one programmable device, one input and one output device
system hardware diagrams showing:
o the devices to be used (further guidance in learning aim C)
o the input/output data flow between devices
o device communication method (either serial or parallel)
o any mechanical structures, e.g. chassis and wheels and the assembly method of
devices/components
a control program specification including:
o a description of the main program tasks input and output format
o algorithms, e.g. structured English, flow charts, pseudocode
a list of any predefined code and their sources, e.g. the internet, other media such as
CD or DVD
a brief outline of alternative solutions for the intended automated system, e.g.
alternative sensor types and hardware configurations
a test plan and, if appropriate, test data (to test the system inputs and expected
outputs)
constraints, e.g. device capabilities including connectivity and availability, memory
storage or programming language.
267

Learning aim C: Develop and test an automated system
Develop an automated system
Assemble hardware, including:
programmable devices/controllers that can read from input devices (e.g. sensors)
and control output devices (e.g. actuators, motors) and store and process data (e.g.
Lego RCX/NXT, Arduino, PIC)
input devices, e.g. light-dependent resistors, touch sensors, switches,
accelerometers, infrared sensors, potentiometers, sound sensors, touch sensors,
temperature sensors
output devices, e.g. LEDs and LED arrays, lights, motors, servo valves, linear
actuators, sound emitters (e.g. piezo speakers, buzzers, amplifiers),
relays (e.g. H-bridge ICs for motor control)
other components:
o power source, e.g. photovoltaic cells and batteries
o mechanical structures, e.g. protective/aesthetic shell, chassis (a framework that
supports a manmade object), axles, wheels
o data storage, e.g. solid state storage device.
Consider Health and safety issues, e.g. hardware, electrical connection risks and
guidelines, handling equipment
Develop control software program
Use a development environment to produce original code and edit predefined program
or code.
Develop and refine the control program using suitable programming language
constructs and techniques.
Annotate the code to demonstrate understanding of the constructs/techniques and
processing to allow effective repair/debugging of the program and for maintainability.
Programming constructs and techniques
Program constructs, e.g.:
comments
constants (variables with a constant value that cannot change)
operators (arithmetic [ + * / % ] and logical [ < <= > >= AND OR true
false])
reserved words, which have special meaning within the programming language and
are used to write instructions in a program, e.g. in NXT motor and while are
reserved words.
input and output commands
local and global variables
assignment
sequence
counter controlled and conditional loops (while do, repeat until, for next)
sequential statements, selections (if then else)
data types, e.g. integer and real (numbers), string (text), Boolean
continued
268

data structures, e.g. arrays, user-defined variables
data storage, e.g. within hardware devices, on removable media
subroutines/functions/procedures.
Testing and refining the automated system
Test automated system for functionality, e.g. against test plan, and if required, test
data.
Gather feedback from others, e.g. client, users on the automated system.
Briefly document any changes to the design, including:
changes to the references of sources for predefined code
annotations on the code
improvements and/or refinements to the automated system.
Learning aim D: Review the finished automated system
Review the finished automated system against:
original requirements and purpose (as defined in the brief)
constraints, e.g. programming language, time, device capabilities such as memory,
connectivity, availability
269
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit
2A.P1 Explain the features and

benefits of two different
given automated
systems.
270
a list of any
predefined code
a list of any
predefined code.*
a test plan.*
a control program
specification
an outline control
program specification
2B.P3 Produce a design for an

automated system,
including:
a system hardware
diagram
Produce a design for an

automated system, with
1B.3

for an automated
system.
an outline system
hardware diagram

user requirements for an
automated system.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design an automated system
1A.1 Identify the features and

benefits of two different
given automated
systems.

decisions, explaining
how the automated
system will fulfil the
stated purpose and the
user requirements,
describing the impact of
any constraints on the
design.*

automated systems.
Level 2 Distinction
a detailed control
program specification.*
two or more system

hardware diagrams
2B.M2 Produce a detailed design

for an automated system,
including:
2A.M1 Review what one of the

given automated systems
does, providing a flow
chart to show the
processing of the control
system.
Learning aim A: Understand the characteristics of automated systems
Level 1
Assessment criteria
Level 2 Pass
repair any hardware

and/or program faults.
test the automated

system for
functionality
With guidance:
(Please see guidance).
a control program
using appropriate
*
at least one
programmable device,
input device and
output device
Develop an automated
containing:
2C.P5 Test the automated

system for functionality
using the test plan and
requirements. Repair
any hardware and/or
program faults.
a control program
using appropriate
constructs/techniques,
which is appropriately
annotated.*
at least one
programmable device,
input device and
output device
2C.P4 Develop an automated

system containing:
2C.M4 Test the automated

system, including
additional functionality,
requirements, gathering
feedback from others.
Repair any hardware or
program faults.

automated system that
meets the given brief and
contains a default failsafe state.*
Level 2 Merit
1C.5
1C.4
Learning aim C: Develop and test an automated system
Level 1
271
2C.D3 Refine the automated

system, using feedback
from others, to improve
the systems
performance.*
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass

system is suitable for the
and purpose.

system meets the
and purpose.
272
1D.6
Learning aim D: Review the finished automated system
Level 1
2D.D4 Evaluate the final system

against the initial
designs and justify any
changes that were
made, making
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction

which the system meets
the original requirements,
from others and any
constraints.
Level 2 Merit
Teacher guidance
Resources
As a minimum, each learner will need access to hardware devices found in a suitable
self-assembly kit for automated systems, specifically:
a programmable device/microcontroller, e.g. Arduino, PIC, Lego programmable
brick (RCX or NXT) with programming interface and cabling
a programming environment, e.g. Arduino, PICAXE Programming Editor,
PICLogicator, Lego NXT Mindstorms environment, LabVIEW, Flowol 4
input devices, e.g. sensors for touch, light, sound, humidity, resistance,
temperature, infrared, Hall Effect
output devices, e.g. motors, servos, LEDs, lights, linear actuators
other components, e.g. mechanical structure, power source, storage media
(e.g. SD card).
It is important that hardware devices and components include the accompanying
manuals, software installation disks or installation packages (downloaded in advance
from the manufacturers website).
The practical activities should take place in a workshop with appropriate tools and
should take account of health and safety requirements.
Learners should be provided with a brief which allows them to meet the assessment
requirements of the unit. Briefs can either be generated by the centre, or by the
learner, and then approved by the centre.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners need access to a selection of different automated systems. At least two
systems should be investigated: one should be a basic automated (e.g. linefollowing) vehicle and the other should be a commercial system, e.g. controlling
temperature or traffic lights. These can be placed into context by the use of case
studies or local examples, and demonstrated in the classroom.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the characteristics of two given and different
automated systems. The description should cover the what the systems do, their
benefits and features, for example hardware devices and control programs of the
automated system.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the characteristics of two given
and different automated systems. They are likely to be presented as a list without a
description of how the system works.
For 2A.M1: learners should review what one of the classroom-demonstrated
automated systems does and provide a flow chart to show the processing in the
control program.
For 2A.D1: learners should discuss the strengths and weaknesses of one of the
classroom-demonstrated automated systems. Learners should consider at least one
strength and at least one weakness.
273
Learning aim B
Learners should understand the functionality of a range of hardware devices and
components. They should also be familiar with the control program programming
environment and a range of constructs/techniques used within the programming
language.
Learners will establish the requirements for developing an automated system given in
a brief. The brief should:
allow learners to explore the possibilities when fulfilling the requirements of the brief
allow learners to produce an automated system using a suitable kit-based system
be written with a client in mind with clearly stated resource requirements and
objectives.
a description of the purpose of the automated system, e.g. an automated vehicle
designed to carry a 1 kg mass and follow a line, turning right and left as required
over a 5 m route
a timeframe
a budget (costs)
the constraints, e.g. system is to operate in an internal, dry environment.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the development of the automated
system as part of the learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
automated system for the design.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the user requirements and the
purpose for the design of the automated system.
For 2B.P3: learners will produce a design for an automated system built using a selfassembly kit of appropriate hardware devices. As a minimum, the system will contain
at least one programmable device, one input device and one output device. Learners
designs should include:
a description of purpose and the requirements of the client/user
a system hardware diagram showing the devices to be used and illustrating the
mechanical structures, e.g. chassis and wheels and the assembly of
devices/components
a control program specification describing the main program tasks, e.g. data input
and output format
a list of any predefined code
test plan, outlining a range of tests for logic and functionality.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should produce, with guidance, an outline design
for an automated system containing at least one programmable device, one input
device and one output device. The design should include:
an outline system hardware diagram showing the devices and components to
be used
an outline control program specification containing a description of the main
program tasks e.g. data input and output format
a list of any predefined code.
274
For 2B.M2: in addition to the requirements for the pass grade, learners should produce:
at least two system hardware diagrams:
o at least one showing the devices to be used, input and output data flow between
devices, and the device communication method
o at least one illustrating any mechanical structures and the assembly method of
devices/components
a detailed control program specification describing the main program tasks and
algorithms, e.g. structured English, flow charts, pseudocode outlining how the
control program will work
a brief outline of any alternative solutions and why they were configured in a
certain way.
For 2B.D2: learners are expected to be able to justify their design decisions and
how the chosen design fulfils the stated purpose and user requirements for the
given brief. They should consider suitability for the end user and the quality and
thoroughness of their design work. Learners need to review their design in light of
any constraints arising from the hardware (for example operational range of sensors,
the availability of devices) and control programming language. Learners should
justify why alternative design ideas were rejected.
Learning aim C
This learning aim is all about developing and testing an automated system for a
given brief.
For 2C.P4: learners will implement their design. Some learners will find that their
designs do not allow them to implement a solution. In this case, learners should
amend their automated system and record changes to their design. They should
develop their automated system by:
assembling (while adhering to all health and safety guidelines) a range of
hardware devices as a minimum the system should contain at least:
o one programmable device/controller, e.g. Lego RCX/NXT, Arduino, PIC
o one input device, e.g. light-dependent resistors, touch sensors, switches
o one output device, e.g. LED arrays, motors, relays, servo valves
o other components, e.g. power source, mechanical structures
develop a control program for the automated system by editing predefined code
and some original code using appropriate constructs and techniques. The program
must include reading from at least one sensor and result in at least one output to a
device. Learners should also ensure that they develop solutions using some
constructs/techniques from the more complex content in learning aim C (the
constructs/techniques for level 1 assessment are shown at the end of this
guidance). These include conditional-controlled loops and functions.
The code should be annotated to demonstrate understanding and to allow
effective repair/debugging of the program and maintainability.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should use their designs to develop an automated
system. They will assemble a range of hardware devices (at least one programmable
device, one input device and one output device) and develop a control program using
level 1 constructs/techniques (identified at the end of this guidance). Learners will need
guidance when completing this criterion.
For 2C.M3: learners should produce an automated system that satisfies the brief. The
system should contain a fail-safe default state, for example, the system shuts down if the
system limits are breached. Learners are likely to need to adapt their designs to create a
fully-functioning system.
275
For 2C.P5: learners will test the automated system for functionality against the original
requirements and using their test plans. For example, does the system meet its stated
purpose; do input devices and output devices respond as expected? The automated
system should function; however, it may not fully meet the brief.
As they develop their automated system, learners are likely to experience hardware
and control programming technical difficulties. Where this happens, learners should
troubleshoot and resolve these difficulties, finding and repairing any faults. To aid this
process, learners may want to use a console to monitor the state of the system during
operation. It is important that learners make appropriate comments in their code and
briefly document any changes made to both the hardware and control program.
Where appropriate, it is acceptable to photograph problems and solutions or to use
witness statements as evidence of this process.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should develop and test the automated systems
main functions and repair any hardware and control program faults. They will need
guidance in order to achieve this criteria.
For 2C.M4: learners should test their automated system including any additional
functionality and the fail-safe state, using test data as appropriate. The default fail-safe
state should operate when certain limits are breached.
They should correct any hardware and control program faults found in the code and
produce evidence to show any changes made to the system.
Learners should obtain feedback on their automated system from others, for example
from someone acting as a user of the system. Their system should fully meet the original
requirements of the brief.
For 2C.D3: Teachers should recognise that the process of developing and testing
automated systems is iterative and not a sequential process. Consequently, this criterion
is assessed during an iterative development process.
Learners should refine the automated system, taking account of feedback from others to
improve the systems performance, for example to complete a task more efficiently or
more accurately. Examples include controlling temperature within a smaller tolerance or
introducing ability to adapt to different external conditions, e.g. an automated vehicle
designed to transport a 1 kg mass between two points could adapt to the terrain by
changing speed, using less energy and reducing power consumption.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P6: learners should describe how their automated system meets the original
requirements and purpose in light of the results of their testing. Learners should be
encouraged to celebrate the strengths of their work.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their automated system meets
the original requirements and purpose.
For 2D.M5: learners should build on the outcomes for the Pass criterion, to consider the
outcomes of their testing and describe the extent to which the automated system meets
the original requirements of the brief. Learners should gather feedback from others and
consider changes they would like to make in the light of this feedback. Learners should
consider any constraints that they have had to deal with when modifying the system.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate their initial designs and the completed automated
system. They should identify any changes made from the design stage and justify them
against the requirements and the features of the hardware and control programming
language used. Learners should make at least three specific suggestions for improving
the completed system, for example, identifying points of potential failure and suggesting
how the system could be improved to prevent it. Learners do not have to implement the
enhancements.
276
Control program constructs/techniques for level 1 assessment

Some learners may fail to achieve a full Pass at level 2, so learners being assessed
for the level 1 criteria for learning aims B and C are not required to include all of the
different control programming constructs in their work for assessment.
The constructs that learners working at level 1 should be familiar with and include in
their assessment evidence are shown below.
Use program constructs and techniques, e.g.:
program constructs, e.g.:
o comments
o constantsvariables with a constant value that cannot change
o operatorsarithmetic ( +, )
o reserved words that have special meaning within the programming language and
are used to write instructions in a program
o input and output commands
o local variables - only exist inside the subroutine/function where they are declared
and used
o global variables
o assignment
o sequence
o counter controlled loops
use a range of data types, e.g. character, string (text), integer and real (numbers)
use data structures, e.g. user-defined data types and record structures.
277
Automated
Systems in Action
2A.P1, 2A.M1
2A.D1, (1A.1)
278
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Flow chart.
Presentation or report
Assessment evidence
So that the customer understands how the

control program works, you have also been
asked to provide a flow chart showing the
algorithms used to control the basic automated
vehicle.
a commercial city-centre traffic light control

program the system monitors the flow of
traffic based on inputs from inductance
sensors in the road and alters the timing of
the lights during each 24 hour period
depending on the volume of traffic.
a basic line-following automated vehicle that

will move through a simple predetermined
route and avoid obstacles
You work for a company that specialises in

developing automated systems. A potential
customer wants to know more about the
characteristics of automated systems. You
have been asked to prepare a presentation on
the benefits and features of the following two
systems:
Scenario
Please note that for the Automated Systems in Action assignment teachers should allow learners to investigate two different systems. One
system should be a working kit-based system that can be demonstrated in the classroom and the other should be a commercial system.
For the basic classroom system, the control program should be made available for learners to investigate.
The table below shows a programme of suggested assignment outlines that cover the pass, merit and distinction criteria. This is guidance
and it is recommended that centres either write their own assignments or adapt any assignments we provide to meet local needs and
resources.
Suggested assignments
The customer liked the presentation and would

now like to see a design for a prototype
automated vehicle which can be used to
demonstrate the principles of a commercial
system. The prototype vehicle should be
capable of delivering a 1 kg mass between two
points that are 5 m apart, avoiding any
obstacles.
Design for an
Automated Vehicle
Develop and Test

the Automated
Vehicle
2B.P2, 2B.P3,
2B.M2, 2B.D2,
(1B.2, 1B.3)
2C.P4, 2C.P5,
2C.M3, 2C.M4,
2C.D3 (1C.4, 1C.5)
Refine the prototype, based on feedback from

the customer or your manager where
appropriate, to improve the performance of
the system. For example, you might reduce
the time taken to deliver the 1 kg mass or
make the vehicle adapt to different external
conditions, for example the nature of the
terrain.
Develop and test the prototype automated

vehicle. The control program must allow the
automated vehicle to travel between two
points that are 5 m apart to deliver a 1 kg
mass and avoid any obstacles.
Prepare a justification for the customer to

explain why you have designed the system the
way you have, and what you considered.
The design should include an alternative

solution and explain how the automated
vehicle will fulfil the stated purpose and the
user requirements. Any constraints that impact
on the design should be covered.
Scenario
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Feedback from the customer or

manager.
Test results
Annotated control program
Video of the automated guided vehicle
Test plan.
A list of any predefined code
A description of alternative solutions
A control program specification
System hardware diagram(s)
A description of purpose and user

requirements
Assessment evidence
279
Review the
Automated Vehicle
2D.P6, 2D.M5,
2D.D4, (1D.6)
280
Assignment title
Criteria covered
Annotated design documents.
Feedback from the customer
Evaluation report
Assessment evidence
Justify how your design has changed during

improve the prototype system further.
Review the prototype automated vehicle,

describing its strengths and potential further
improvements. Consider the extent to which
the automated system meets the original
requirements and addresses feedback given
from the customer.
Scenario
UNIT 17: MULTIMEDIA PRODUCTS DEVELOPMENT
Unit 17:
Level: 1 and 2
Unit introduction
When you play computer games, visit exhibitions, or go shopping online you will
experience multimedia in action. You will also encounter it every time you watch a
DVD, use online learning materials or visit a social networking site.
Multimedia plays an ever expanding and increasingly important role in daily life. It
allows you to access information in new and inspiring ways, using combinations of
assets such as video, sound effects, music, animation, images and text to create
interactive products that are stimulating and easy to use. Relevant job roles include
multimedia specialists who use software to manipulate assets into products and
software developers/programmers who add functionality by writing computer code.
To be successful, a multimedia product must be suitable for the intended purpose
and audience (for a linear product) or user requirements (for an interactive product).
It must also be visually interesting, retain attention and present an intuitive interface
that you will not need to learn, but instinctively know how to use.
Multimedia products include interactive presentations, information points and virtual
reality simulations, as well as computer-based games and movies. These products
have massive markets and there is real demand for people with the imagination and
appropriate technical skills to create them.
In this unit, you will understand how multimedia products are used and the typical
features they contain. You will be able to apply some of your findings when creating
your own multimedia products. You will design, develop and test your own
multimedia products against a brief.
Once completed you will review your work and obtain feedback from others.
In particular, this unit develops skills from Unit 1: The Online World, Unit 4: Creating
Digital Animation, Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio, Unit 6: Creating Digital Graphics
and Unit 7: Creating Digital Video. Unit 12: Software Development will also
complement the content of this unit.
Learning aims
A understand the uses and features of multimedia products
B design multimedia products
C develop and test multimedia products
D review the finished multimedia products.
281

Learning aim A: Understand the uses and features of multimedia products
Purpose of multimedia products
The purpose of multimedia products is to present content to and engage an audience
using a collection of assets, such as video and graphics, to provide an enhanced,
multi-sensory, experience.
Content can include the different assets: video clips, sound effects, music, animation
sequences and images, as well as text.
Know why individuals or organisations use multimedia products
Uses of multimedia products:
present information, e.g. interactive slideshows, virtual tours
communicate with people, e.g. social networking, video conferencing
entertainment and leisure, e.g. computer games and movies
commerce, e.g. promotion of products and services
education, e.g. computer-aided learning, interactive assessments
develop skills, e.g. flight simulators.
Features of multimedia products
Types of multimedia product:
linear products presenting pages or screens to an audience in a pre-determined
sequence, e.g. a slideshow or movie.
interactive products built in screen navigation and other features that allow users to
interact with the product, e.g. computer games and simulations.
Different features of products, e.g.:
ease of navigation
interactivity
appropriateness of content
game elements (i.e. light effects, characters)
game play (i.e. scoring, levels, rules, controls).
Know how these features of multimedia products are used to improve the user
experience for an individual, for example, how sound effects are used in computer
games, video clips are embedded in learning packages, or animations are used in
information points.
282

Learning aim B: Design multimedia products
To design a linear product and interactive product.
Design documentation
Documentation to include:
requirements of the brief (audience, purpose and user requirements)
documented ideas/prototypes including:
o records of stimulus materials and mind maps of first ideas
o storyboard, containing a number of panels, showing the intended layout, content
and structure of the product
o timelines for animations and movie clips with synchronised sound
o hierarchy chart, to illustrate navigation, how screens are accessed
o styles and formats, e.g. mood boards for colours, fonts and images
o original and ready-made digital assets, e.g. animation, graphics, audio (e.g. sound
effects and voice) and video clips. Sources for ready-made assets and details of
editing should be documented and referenced
test plans, to test functionality and user experience
a brief outline of alternative design ideas, e.g. different characters, layouts/
structures and styles.
283

Learning aim C: Develop and test multimedia products
Develop linear and interactive multimedia products
Use multimedia authoring tools/techniques, e.g.:
create and edit assets:
o text
o images and other graphics
o video clips, e.g. cut and join together, add effects
o navigation, e.g. menus, hyperlinks (internal and external)
o interactive components, e.g. hot spots, buttons, menus, rollover images
o colour schemes, fonts and styles
o animations, such as cut-out (i.e tweens), rotoscoping and skeletal
o audio, including synchronisation of sound effects, music and voice over
update the sources table with details of any ready-made assets
combine assets to create multimedia products
export and compress assets into suitable file types and sizes
if original video or audio is produced then consideration should be given to health
and safety while recording, e.g. trailing cables, carrying heavy equipment, high
volume levels and the environment where the recording will take place (e.g. on
location).
Testing multimedia products
Test multimedia products for functionality, quality and usability.
Obtain feedback from others, for example, effectiveness, content, presentation,
interaction, usability, performance and purpose.
Make improvements and/or refinements to multimedia products in response to testing
and feedback from others.
Learning aim D: Review the finished multimedia products
Review the finished multimedia products against:
fitness for purpose
audience (for a linear product)
user requirements (for an interactive product)
functionality
user experience, e.g. usability, quality, performance
constraints
284
Level 2 Pass
Level 2 Merit

different multimedia
products.

different multimedia
products.
Produce an outline
design for an interactive
multimedia product, with
guidance.
1B.3
a test plan.#
assets
documented product
ideas/prototypes
2B.P3 Produce designs for one

linear and one
interactive multimedia
product. Each design
must include:
2B.P2 Describe the

audience/user
requirements and
purpose for the design of
one linear and one
product.
2B.M2 Produce detailed designs

for the multimedia
products, including
reasons why alternative
ideas have been
discarded.
2A.M1 Review how the

multimedia products are
fit for purpose and their
intended effect on the
audience/users.
Identify the
audience/user
requirements and
purpose for the design of
an interactive
multimedia product.
1B.2
Learning aim B: Design multimedia products
1A.1
Learning aim A: Understand the uses and features of multimedia products
Level 1
Assessment criteria
285

audience/users.
fulfil the stated

purpose and
requirements of the
brief

decisions, explain how
they will:

and weaknesses of two
multimedia products.
Level 2 Distinction
Level 2 Pass
Develop an interactive
multimedia product using
suitable tools/techniques
to combine assets and
content, with guidance.
Test the interactive

multimedia product for
functionality and
changes, with guidance.
1C.5
1C.6
286
Prepare assets for an

product, with guidance.
1C.4
2C.M4 Develop one linear and

one interactive
multimedia product,
demonstrating an
awareness of
audience/user
requirements and taking
account of usability.
2C.M5 Test any additional
functionality and gather
feedback from others on
the quality of the
products and use this to
improve the products,
demonstrating an
awareness of
audience/user
requirements.
2C.P5 Develop one linear and

one interactive
multimedia product using
suitable tools/techniques
to combine assets and
content, demonstrating
awareness of purpose.
2C.P6 Test the multimedia
products for functionality
and purpose, repairing
any faults and
documenting changes.
2C.D3 Refine the high-quality

multimedia products,
taking account of
feedback from others to
enhance the
audience/user
experience.
Level 2 Distinction
2C.M3 Prepare assets and

content for the
demonstrating an
awareness of
audience/user
sources fully referenced.
Level 2 Merit
2C.P4 Prepare assets and

content for the
demonstrating
awareness of purpose
and listing sources of
assets.
Learning aim C: Develop and test multimedia products
Level 1
Level 2 Pass


multimedia products are
audience/user
requirements and
purpose.

which the final
multimedia products
audience/user
requirements, while
from others and
constraints.
Level 2 Merit
1D.7
Learning aim D: Review the finished multimedia products
Level 1
287

multimedia products
against the designs and
justify any changes
made, making
recommendations for
Level 2 Distinction
Teacher guidance
Resources
The special resources required for this unit include multimedia authoring software
that enables the creation and editing of digital assets, including graphics, video,
sound and animation. For example:
graphics Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop and Google Picasa 3 (freeware)
game Authoring Gamemaker, Multimedia Fusion and Flash
sprite Production Fireworks, Serif Draw Plus and Spriteforge
3-D Modelling Google Sketchup (Free) and Blender (Free)
audio Audacity, Soundation (online) and Adobe Soundbooth
video Apple iMovie, Microsoft Moviemaker and Corel VideoStudio
media playersQuickTime Player and Windows Media Player
Presentation software must not be used in the development of both products.
Learners will need a brief specifying the requirements for a linear multimedia product
and an interactive multimedia product. The brief can either be created by the centre
or by the learner and approved by the centre.
Assessment guidance
Learning aim A
Learners will investigate at least one linear and one interactive multimedia product to
understand the uses of these products and their features. The products should be
designed for different purposes.
For 2A.P1: learners should explain the uses and features of two different multimedia
products. The multimedia products should be selected to cover a range of multimedia
uses and features to provide learners with an opportunity for a broad and stimulating
investigation.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify the intended uses and features of
two multimedia products.
For 2A.M1: learners should review how the multimedia products are fit for purpose
and their intended effect on the audience/users.
For 2A.D1: learners should look at the multimedia products in more detail to discuss
their strengths and weaknesses. They should consider at least one strength and at
least one weakness.
Learning aim B
Learners should now have an understanding of what makes up a multimedia product.
As learners develop their own multimedia products, they will be able to apply
concepts that they discover or observe during their investigation.
Learners will design, develop and test two multimedia products, one linear product
and one interactive product.
288
Scenarios suitable for a brief should allow learners to achieve all assessment
criteria. The brief must include the following requirements for each product (as a
minimum):
a description of the purpose (clear objectives of what the multimedia products are
intended to achieve)
a description of the intended audience for the linear product and intended user
requirements for the interactive product.
location of the product, e.g for a projector and screen or a mobile device.
Centres are encouraged to use evidence for the multimedia products as part of the
learners digital portfolio (Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio).
The learner may use any appropriate digital medium for presenting evidence, for
instance a movie showing snapshots throughout the development process would be
appropriate, as would blog entries as developments are made.
For 2B.P2: for the multimedia products learners should describe the purpose and
audience (for the linear product)/user requirements (for the interactive product).
For level 1, learners should identify the purpose and audience/user requirements for
an interactive multimedia product.
For 2B.P3: learners must first understand and interpret the brief for each
multimedia product. They should produce design documentation that includes:
ideas/prototypes that clearly indicate the idea and what the multimedia products
might look like. These should include:
o storyboard, containing a number of panels, to illustrate the layout, content
(including interactive features) and structure of the product
o timelines for any animations and movie clips, with synchronised audio
o sources tables identifying ready-made digital assets, e.g. animation, graphics,
music and sound effects, voice over, video clips
test plans (to test for functionality).
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should design an interactive multimedia product.
The outline design ideas will contain a product structure, including a storyboard
containing a number of panels. They should identify at least two assets that are to be
incorporated into the product.
produce detailed designs for their multimedia products. The detailed documents
should include:
records of stimulus materials and mind maps of first ideas
styles and formats, e.g. mood boards for colours, fonts and images
hierarchy chart of the content, to illustrate navigation, how screens are accessed
hardware, software and other resources required for their products.
Learners should include a brief outline of alternative solutions for the intended
multimedia products, giving reasons why some solutions were discarded.
For 2B.D2: learners should justify their design decisions, explaining how the
multimedia products will fulfil the stated purpose and original requirements. Learners
should justify the use of specific features which have been incorporated to enhance
the user experience.
289
why, for example I have used sound fading in here because . They should also
justify why they have chosen to combine assets in this way to fulfil the brief and why
the chosen design was selected and others rejected.
Learning aim C
Learners will have a design of what their intended multimedia products will do, look
like and how they will be tested. They should now be ready to apply their practical
skills and knowledge to combine mainly ready-made assets to develop their products
and test their outcomes. Many of the ready-made assets will have either been
gathered from third parties, for example available from the internet while taking due
consideration of copyright or created by completing units 4, 5, 6 and 7 on Creating
Digital Animation, Creating Digital Audio, Creating Digital Graphics and Creating
Digital Video respectively. Learners can produce additional original assets, but this
should not be the focus of this unit.
For 2C.P4: learners should prepare assets (by gathering and editing assets and, if
required, creating them) and list the sources for any ready-made assets. At least four
assets should be included in each product, such as audio clips and animations, as
outlined in their designs. They should demonstrate an awareness of the purpose of
the multimedia products.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should prepare their assets for their interactive
product, with guidance, for example, a graphic should be cropped appropriately.
Learners should include at least two assets (one audio and one animation).
For 2C.M3 learners should prepare their assets and content for the products, while
taking into consideration the audience for the linear product and user requirements
for the interactive product. All ready-made assets should be fully referenced in a
sources table, with enough detail for another person to independently obtain the
assets used.
For 2C.P5: learners should use appropriate software tools/techniques to combine
their assets and develop their multimedia products, while demonstrating an
awareness of the intended purpose.
As a minimum, the linear product should contain interlinked screens with:
combinations of images with text
suitable colour scheme and fonts
screen transitions
at least two video clips
entry and exit effects applied to assets
title screen(s).
As a minimum, the interactive product should contain:
user interface for navigation and control
suitable colour scheme and fonts
at least two animated assets
background sound track
title screen(s).
If original video or audio is required as part of the design then due consideration
should be given to health and safety issues while recording, e.g. the environment
where the recording is due to take place.
290
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have used appropriate tools/techniques to

combine assets to develop at least the interactive multimedia product, with guidance.
The minimum expected is a user interface for navigation and control, background
sound track, at least two animated assets and a title screen.
For 2C.M4: learners must continue to use tools and techniques to improve the
multimedia products, demonstrating an awareness of audience for the linear product
and user requirements for the interactive product.
For the linear product learners should take account of:
suitable animation of text
consistency of colour scheme and layout
whether video clips are edited and combined with other assets
automated running.
For the interactive product learners should take account of:
controls such as stop, rewind, replay, navigation and character movement
whether sound is synchronised to the animated assets
fade in/out of music and voice over.
For 2C.P6: learners will be expected to follow their test plans and test the
functionality of their multimedia products, checking that they are fit for purpose.
Learners are likely to experience technical difficulties as they develop their products.
Learners will be expected to repair their multimedia products. It is important that
learners make appropriate comments on their test plans or in accompanying logs
about such issues and how they have resolved them.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should test the functionality and fitness for purpose
of their products and repaired faults. They should document any changes made and will
need guidance to complete this activity.
For 2C.M5: over and above the existing functionality testing learners will be required
to test the functionality of the additional usability features, as implemented for
2C.M4.
Learners should complete user-experience testing, with the help of at least one
person who can act as a representative of the target audience for the linear product
and intended users for the interactive product. The test user should be commenting
on the effectiveness of the multimedia experience provided. Learners should record
this feedback as part of the testing process.
multimedia products is an iterative and not sequential process. When making
refinements to their products, learners should take into account their test results and
feedback from others.
The multimedia products should engage the intended audience/users. For instance, a
linear product, such as a film trailer, should combine video clips, high quality voice
over and synchronised sound effects, with text and an interactive product, such as a
computer game, should be highly playable, original, creative and interactive.
Learning aim D
For 2D.P7: learners should explain why the final products are fit for purpose and
suitable for the intended audience/user requirements. For each product, learners
should give one reason why it is fit for purpose and one reason relating to
audience/user requirements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should identify how their final interactive
multimedia product is fit for purpose, for example, My simple game is suitable for
Key Stage 2 children as it includes fun characters which are easy to control.
291
For 2D.M6: learners should build on the explanations given in the Pass criteria and
refer back to the original requirements and purpose, as defined in the brief. They
should also seek and record feedback from others about the suitability of the final
multimedia products and consider the impact of any constraints.
For 2D.D4: learners should evaluate the initial design ideas/prototypes against the
final multimedia products, concentrating on the overall user experience and any
original requirements given in the brief. They should justify any changes that were
made during development and explain the rationale for any changes.
Learners should use this feedback to identify at least three further potential
improvements but do not have to implement the enhancements.
For level 1, as a minimum, learners should have identified at least one strength and
one potential improvement to their multimedia product.
292
Investigation
2A.P1, 2A.M1,
2A.D1, (1A.1)
Think about the strengths and weaknesses of

the multimedia products.
The customer would also like to find out how the

multimedia products are fit for purpose and what
their intended effect is on the audience/users.
You have been asked to produce a presentation

which describes the uses and features of at least
one linear and one interactive multimedia
product.
You are a consultant working for a multimedia

development company. A customer (the client)
has approached you asking for more information
about multimedia products.
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Supporting materials.
Presentation slides and notes.
Assessment evidence
293
Design, develop and test a simple, single player computer game based on a maze. The game should be fun to play, aimed at Key Stage 2
children and maintain interest by incorporating levels of increasing difficulty. The game is to be played on laptops and standard PCs and
should include user instructions on game play.
Brief 2
Design, develop and test a multimedia presentation intended to introduce the work of a charity concerned with the conservation of the
rainforest. The presentation should be aimed at Key Stage 4 school pupils. It should be designed to inform them of the problems
associated with the loss of the rainforest. The presentation is to be shown in school classrooms, using a large screen and data projector.
The final presentation must include a list of all the digital assets used in its development.
Brief 1
294
The customer would like you to develop two

multimedia products based on two briefs.
Design multimedia
products
2B.P2, 2B.P3,
2B.M2, 2B.M3,
2B.D2, (1B.2, 1B.3)
A test plan for each multimedia

product.
A list in a sources table of original

and ready-made assets for each
multimedia product.
Proposed and alternative solutions for

each multimedia product.
A description of purpose and

audience/user requirements for each
multimedia product.
Assessment evidence
Describe any constraints that have affected your

design.
Each multimedia product design should include

alternative solutions and explain how they fulfil
the stated purpose and audience/user
requirements. Explain why any ideas you are not
using have been rejected.
a test plan.
a table of sources
hierarchy chart of content
timeline to indicate how assets combine
digital assets
storyboard to show the layout and structure
product ideas/prototypes, including styles,

templates and formats
purpose and audience/user requirements
You have been asked to develop and document a

design for each product. Each design should
include:
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
Refine each multimedia product, based on

feedback from others, where appropriate to do
so, to enhance the audience/user experience.
3. testing each multimedia product

against the test plan, checking the
original requirements are still being
met and documenting any changes
made.
2. developing each multimedia product to

fulfil the stated purpose and
requirements set out in a brief
1. preparing (if required create, edit and

optimise) digital assets that you will
use in each multimedia product
Functional multimedia products.

develop two multimedia products for the
customer. This will involve:
Develop and test

multimedia
products
2C.P4, 1C.P5,
2C.P6, 2C.M3,
2C.M4, 2C.M5,
2C.D3, (1C.4, 1C.5,
1C.6)
Updated sources table.
Annotated design.
Assessment evidence
Scenario
Assignment
Criteria covered
295
Review the
multimedia
products
2D.P7, 2D.M6,
2D.D4, (1D.7)
296
Assignment
Criteria covered
Annotated design documents.
Justify where your design has changed during

the development (from design to final product).
Consider what you have changed following
feedback and explain how you would improve
each multimedia product further.
Evaluation report.
Having completed the multimedia products, you

now have to review them. Review your products
and explain why they are suitable for the client
(based on the requirements and purpose given
in the brief), while considering feedback from
others and any constraints.
Assessment evidence
Scenario
ANNEXES
Annexe A
A FRAMEWORK OF PERSONAL, LEARNING AND THINKING SKILLS 1119
IN ENGLAND
Source QCDA
The framework comprises six groups of skills that are essential to success in learning,
life and work. In essence, the framework captures the essential skills of: managing
self; managing relationships with others; and managing own learning, performance
and work. It is these skills that will enable young people to enter work and adult life
confident and capable.
The titles of the six groups of skills are set out below.
Team workers
Self-managers
Independent enquirers
Reflective learners
Creative thinkers
Effective participators
For each group, there is a focus statement that sums up the range of skills. This is
followed by a set of outcome statements that are indicative of the skills, behaviours
and personal qualities associated with each group.
Each group is distinctive and coherent. The groups are also interconnected. Young
people are likely to encounter skills from several groups in any one learning
experience. For example, an independent enquirer would set goals for their research
with clear success criteria (reflective learner) and organise and manage their time
and resources effectively to achieve these (self-manager). In order to acquire and
develop fundamental concepts such as organising oneself, managing change, taking
responsibility and perseverance, learners will need to apply skills from all six groups
in a wide range of learning contexts.
297
ANNEXES
The skills
Independent enquirers
Focus:
Young people process and evaluate information in their investigations, planning what to
do and how to go about it. They take informed and well-reasoned decisions, recognising
that others have different beliefs and attitudes.
Young people:
identify questions to answer and problems to resolve
plan and carry out research, appreciating the consequences of decisions
explore issues, events or problems from different perspectives
analyse and evaluate information, judging its relevance and value
consider the influence of circumstances, beliefs and feelings on decisions and events
support conclusions, using reasoned arguments and evidence.
Creative thinkers
Focus:
Young people think creatively by generating and exploring ideas, making original
connections. They try different ways to tackle a problem, working with others to find
imaginative solutions and outcomes that are of value.
Young people:
generate ideas and explore possibilities
ask questions to extend their thinking
connect their own and others ideas and experiences in inventive ways
question their own and others assumptions
try out alternatives or new solutions and follow ideas through
adapt ideas as circumstances change.
Reflective learners
Focus:
Young people evaluate their strengths and limitations, setting themselves realistic goals
with criteria for success. They monitor their own performance and progress, inviting
feedback from others and making changes to further their learning.
Young people:
assess themselves and others, identifying opportunities and achievements
set goals with success criteria for their development and work
review progress, acting on the outcomes
invite feedback and deal positively with praise, setbacks and criticism
evaluate experiences and learning to inform future progress
communicate their learning in relevant ways for different audiences.
298
ANNEXES
Team workers
Focus:
Young people work confidently with others, adapting to different contexts and taking
responsibility for their own part. They listen to and take account of different views.
They form collaborative relationships, resolving issues to reach agreed outcomes.
Young people:
collaborate with others to work towards common goals
reach agreements, managing discussions to achieve results
adapt behaviour to suit different roles and situations, including leadership roles
show fairness and consideration to others
take responsibility, showing confidence in themselves and their contribution
provide constructive support and feedback to others.
Self-managers
Focus:
Young people organise themselves, showing personal responsibility, initiative, creativity
and enterprise with a commitment to learning and self-improvement. They actively
embrace change, responding positively to new priorities, coping with challenges and
looking for opportunities.
Young people:
seek out challenges or new responsibilities and show flexibility when priorities change
work towards goals, showing initiative, commitment and perseverance
organise time and resources, prioritising actions
anticipate, take and manage risks
deal with competing pressures, including personal and work-related demands
respond positively to change, seeking advice and support when needed.
Effective participators
Focus:
Young people actively engage with issues that affect them and those around them.
They play a full part in the life of their school, college, workplace or wider community
by taking responsible action to bring improvements for others as well as themselves.
Young people:
discuss issues of concern, seeking resolution where needed
present a persuasive case for action
propose practical ways forward, breaking these down into manageable steps
identify improvements that would benefit others as well as themselves
try to influence others, negotiating and balancing diverse views to reach workable
solutions
act as an advocate for views and beliefs that may differ from their own.
299
ANNEXES
Summary of the PLTS coverage throughout the programme

This table shows where units support the development of personal, learning and
thinking skills.
Key:
indicates opportunities for development

a blank space indicates no opportunities for development
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
300
Effective
participators
Self-managers
Reflective
learners
Creative
thinkers
Team workers

Independent
enquirers
Unit
ANNEXES
Annexe B
English knowledge and skills signposting
This table shows where an assessment criterion in a BTEC First unit can provide an
opportunity to practise a subject content area from the GCSE English subject criteria
(including functional elements).
Unit number and title
Learning
aim
Assessment
criterion
reference
Subject content
area from the
GCSE subject
criteria (details
of the content
area can be found
below)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1B.3, 2B.P3,
2B.M2, 2B.M3,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
301
ANNEXES
Learning
aim
Assessment
criterion
reference
Subject content
area from the
GCSE subject
criteria (details
of the content
area can be found
below)
N/A
N/A
N/A
2B.P3, 2B.M2,
2B.D2
2, 5, 15, 16
Unit 14 Installing and Maintaining

Computer Hardware
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 15 Installing and Maintaining

Computer Software
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 16 Automated Computer

Systems
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 17 Multimedia Products

Development
2B.P3
2, 5, 15
302
ANNEXES
GCSE English subject content area

The topic areas below are drawn from the GCSE English subject criteria.
Learners should:
1
analyse spoken and written language, exploring impact and how it is achieved
express ideas and information clearly, precisely, accurately and appropriately in

spoken and written communication
form independent views and challenge what is heard or read on the grounds of
reason, evidence or argument
understand and use the conventions of written language, including grammar,

spelling and punctuation
explore questions, solve problems and develop ideas
engage with and make fresh connections between ideas, texts and words
experiment with language to create effects to engage the audience
reflect and comment critically on their own and others use of language.
In speaking and listening, learners should:

9
present and listen to information and ideas
10 respond appropriately to the questions and views of others

11 participate in a range of real-life contexts in and beyond the classroom, adapting
talk to situation and audience and using standard English where appropriate
12 select and use a range of techniques and creative approaches to explore ideas,
texts and issues in scripted and improvised work.
In reading, learners should:
13 understand how meaning is constructed through words, sentences and whole
texts, recognising and responding to the effects of language variation
14 evaluate the ways in which texts may be interpreted differently according to the
perspective of the reader.
In writing, learners should write accurately and fluently:
15 choosing content and adapting style and language to a wide range of forms,
media, contexts, audiences and purposes
16 adapting form to a wide range of styles and genres.
303
304
ANNEXES
Annexe C
Mathematics knowledge and skills signposting
This table shows where an assessment criterion in a BTEC First unit can provide an
opportunity to practise a subject content area from the GCSE Mathematics subject
criteria (including functional elements).
Learning
aim
Assessment
criterion
reference
Subject content
area from the
GCSE subject
criteria (details
of the content
area can be found
below)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1, 3, 4, 6, 21
N/A
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 13, 21
N/A
N/A
N/A
1C.5, 2C.P5,
2C.M4, 2C.D3
1, 7
N/A
N/A
N/A
1C.5, 2C.P5,
2C.M4, 2C.D3
1, 7
N/A
N/A
N/A
1C.5, 2C.P5,
2C.M4, 2C.D3
1, 3, 4, 6, 17
1C.5, 2C.P5,
2C.M4, 2C.D3
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 13, 17
305
ANNEXES
Learning
aim
Assessment
criterion
reference
Subject content
area from the
GCSE subject
criteria (details
of the content
area can be found
below)
1C.5, 2C.P5,
2C.M4, 2C.D3
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 13, 17
N/A
N/A
N/A
1C.4, 2C.P4,
2C.M3, 2C.D3
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 13, 17
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 14: Installing and Maintaining

Computer Hardware
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 15: Installing and Maintaining

Computer Software
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 16: Automated Computer

Systems
1B.3, 2B.P3,
2B.M2, 2B.D2
1, 3, 4, 6, 21
1C.4, 1C.P4,
1C.M3, 2C.D3
1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 13, 21
N/A
N/A
N/A
Unit 17: Multimedia Products

Development
306
ANNEXES
GCSE Mathematics subject content area

The topic areas below are drawn from the GCSE Mathematics subject criteria.
Learners should be able to:
1
understand number size and scale and the quantitative relationship between
units
understand when and how to use estimation
carry out calculations involving +, , , , either singly or in combination,

decimals, fractions, percentages and positive whole number powers
understand and use number operations and the relationships between them,
including inverse operations and the hierarchy of operations
provide answers to calculations to an appropriate degree of accuracy, including a

given power of ten, number of decimal places and significant figures
understand and use the symbols =, <, >, ~
understand and use direct proportion and simple ratios
calculate arithmetic means
understand and use common measures and simple compound measures such as
speed
10 make sensible estimates of a range of measures in everyday settings and choose

appropriate units for estimating or carrying out measurement
11 interpret scales on a range of measuring instruments, work out time intervals
and recognise that measurements given to the nearest whole unit may be
inaccurate by up to one half in either direction
12 plot and draw graphs (line graphs, bar charts, pie charts, scatter graphs,
histograms) selecting appropriate scales for the axes
13 substitute numerical values into simple formulae and equations using appropriate
units
14 translate information between graphical and numerical form
15 design and use data-collection sheets, including questionnaires, for grouped,
discrete or continuous data, process, represent, interpret and discuss the data
16 extract and interpret information from charts, graphs and tables
17 understand the idea of probability
18 calculate area and perimeters of shapes made from triangles and rectangles
19 calculate volumes of right prisms and of shapes made from cubes and cuboids
20 use Pythagoras theorem in 2-D
21 use calculators effectively and efficiently
In addition, level 2 learners should be able to:
22 interpret, order and calculate with numbers written in standard form
23 carry out calculations involving negative powers (only -1 for rate of change)
24 change the subject of an equation
25 understand and use inverse proportion
26 understand and use percentiles and deciles
27 use Pythagoras theorem in 2-D and 3-D
28 use trigonometric ratios to solve 2-D and 3-D problems.
307
308
ANNEXES
Annexe D
Synoptic assessment
Synoptic assessment in information and creative technology is embedded throughout
the units of study. The external units provide the essential knowledge, understanding
and skills required in the subject and underpin the content of the optional specialist
units. Learners studying the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First in Information and
Creative Technology are able to demonstrate a number of synoptic approaches
towards meeting the assessment criteria, including:
showing links and holistic understanding/approaches to several units of study from
the specification
undertaking Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio, using work from all the completed units to
build their digital portfolio
interrelating overarching concepts and issues, bringing together their knowledge of
information and creative technology
developing an appreciation of how topics relate to one another, and how each may
contribute to different uses and applications of technology
making and applying connections to particular technology situations
demonstrating their ability to use and apply a range of different methods and/or
techniques
being able to suggest or apply different approaches to contexts, situations, or in
the effective tackling of specific technology-related problems
synthesising information gained from studying a number of different technologybased activities
using specialist terminology where appropriate
demonstrating use of transferable skills, e.g. communication skills and business
awareness
demonstrating analytical and interpretation skills (of situations and/or results) and
the ability to formulate valid well-argued responses
evaluating and justifying their decisions, choices and recommendations.
Examples
1. In the synoptic unit, Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio, learners reflect on their learning
and identify connections from across their programme of study, such as problemsolving techniques and digital communication methods. The portfolio must include
work from all the units they have completed in the course.
2. All optional specialist units follow the same project life cycle to investigate
existing technology, and then to design, create/develop, test and review either a
computer-based product or a system.
3. Different units support and develop from each other. For example,
Unit 2: Technology Systems supports Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development,
Unit 12: Software Development and Unit 16: Automated Systems Development
as it provides an introduction to programming
Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio and Unit 6: Creating Digital Graphics support
Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation as these technologies are used in the
creation of computer animations
Unit 17: Multimedia Products Development develops the learning from all four
of the Creating Digital units (Units 4, 5, 6 and 7).
309
310
ANNEXES
Annexe E
The structure of the Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First
Award in Information and Creative Technology
The Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and Creative
Technology is taught over 120 guided learning hours (GLH). It has core and optional
specialist units.
Learners must complete Unit 3, and either Unit 1 or Unit 2, and a choice of optional
This BTEC First Award has units that your centre assesses (internal) and a choice of
two units that Edexcel sets and marks (external).
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Award in Information and
Creative Technology
Unit
1
Core units
Assessment
method
GLH
The Online World
External
30
External
30
Internal
30
OR
2
Technology Systems
AND
A Digital Portfolio
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
Internal
30
10
Internal
60
11
Computer Networks
Internal
60
12
Internal
60
13
Website Development
Internal
60
SEB020213 G:\WORDPROC\LT\PD\BTEC FIRST CERTEXTCERT\PHASE 1\ISSUE 2\BF034953_BTEC_CEC_L12_ICT_ISS2.DOC.1-320/0
311
BTEC
FIRST
INFORMATION AND CREATIVE

TECHNOLOGY
Issue 2
For more information on Edexcel and BTEC qualifications

please visit our website: www.edexcel.com
BTEC is a registered trademark of Pearson Education Limited
Pearson Education Limited. Registered in England and Wales No. 872828
Registered Office: Edinburgh Gate, Harlow, Essex CM20 2JE.
VAT Reg No GB 278537121
BTEC First Certificate and Extended Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Specification
Certificate
Specification
Certificate
Specification
INFORMATION AND
CREATIVE TECHNOLOGY
From September 2012
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in Information and Creative Technology
Publications code
Issue 2
BF034953
A LW AY S L E A R N I N G

What The Units Are About

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationBTEC is a registered trademark of Pearson Education Limited. Registered office: Edinburgh Gate, Harlow, Essex CM20 2JE. This specification is issue 2. Key changes are sidelined. We will inform centres of any changes to this issue.

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

What The Units Are About

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

What The Units Are About

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTEC

INFORMATION AND CREATIVE

For more information on Edexcel and BTEC qualifications

Publications Code BF034953

Welcome to your BTEC First 2012 specification

BTECs are evolving

3 Breadth and progression: a range of options building on the core units;

Improved specification and support

What are BTEC Firsts?

Key features of the Edexcel BTEC First Certificate and Extended

Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate and Extended Certificate

Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in Information and

Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in Information and

Personal, learning and thinking skills

English and mathematics knowledge and skills

Access and recruitment

Prior knowledge, skills and understanding

Access to qualifications for learners with disabilities or specific needs

The layout of units in the specification

Summary of internal assessment

Assessment and verification roles

Designing assessment instruments

Authenticity and authentication

Applying criteria to internal assessments

Opportunities to retake assessments

Dealing with malpractice

Reasonable adjustments to assessment

Grade descriptors for the internal and external units

10 Awarding and reporting for the qualification

11 Quality assurance of centres

12 Further information and useful publications

13 Professional development and support

Unit 1: The Online World

Unit 2: Technology Systems

Unit 3: A Digital Portfolio

Unit 4: Creating Digital Animation

Unit 5: Creating Digital Audio

Unit 6: Creating Digital Graphics

Unit 7: Creating Digital Video

Unit 8: Mobile Apps Development

Unit 9: Spreadsheet Development

Unit 10: Database Development

Unit 11: Computer Networks

Unit 12: Software Development

Unit 13: Website Development

Unit 14: Installing and Maintaining Computer Hardware

Unit 15: Installing and Maintaining Computer Software

Unit 16: Automated Computer Systems

Unit 17: Multimedia Products Development

Purpose of this specification

Qualification titles and Qualification

Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Certificate in

Edexcel BTEC Level 1/Level 2 First Extended Certificate in

These qualifications are on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF).

1 What are BTEC Firsts?

The BTEC First suite of qualifications

Art and Design